U.S. Department
ot Transportation
Federal Aviation
Administration
Nitric  Oxide
Measurement  Study
Office of Environment
and Energy
Washington, D.C. 20591
Optical Calibration
Volume I
Report Numbers:
FAA-EE-80-28
USAF ESL TR-80-12
NASA CR-159861
USN NAPC-PE-37C
EPA-460/3-80-013
MAY 1980
L.G. Dodge
M.B. Colket, III
M.F. Zabielski
J. Dusek
D.J. Seery

-------
This document is disseminated under the joint sponsorship
of the Federal Aviation Administration, U.S. Air Force,
U.S. Navy, National Aeronautics and Space Administration,
and the Environmental Protection Agency in the interest of
information exchange.  The United States Government assumes
no liability for the contents or use thereof.

-------
                                                             Technical Report Documentation Page
 1.  Report No.

 FAA-EE-80-28
2. Government Accession No.
3. Recipient's Catalog No.
 4. Title and Subtitle

 Nitric Oxide Measurement Study:   Optical Calibration -
 Volume I
                              5. Report Date
                              October  18, 1979
                              6. Performing Organization Code
 7. Author's) L> G_  Dodge>  M_ B> Colket>  m> M< F. Zabielski
 J.  Dusek, D.  J.  Seery	
                             8.  Performing Orgonizotion Report No.

                              R79-994150-1
 '  P erformi ng Organ i zo* ion N ome and Addre s s
 United Technologies Research  Center
 Silver Lane
 East Hartford, CT   06108
                              10. Work Unit No. (TRAIS)
                              11.  ControcT or Gront No.
                              DOT FA77WA-4081
                                                            13.  Type of Report ond Period Covered
 12.  Sponsoring Agency Nome and Address
 U.S. Department  of Transportation
 Federal Aviation Administration
 Office of Environment and Energy
 Washington,  DC    20591	
                              14. Sponsoring Agency Code
 15.  SuppiementoryNo.es  Funding for  this  study was provided by an Interagency  Committee.
 Contributing agencies and report  nos. are:  DOT-FAA (FAA-EE-80-28);  USAF (ESL TR-80-
 12); NASA  (CR-159861); USN  (NAPC-PE-37C); and  EPA (EPA-460/3-80-013).
 16  Abstroct
 Calibration  devices suitable  for providing known  amounts of nitic  oxide (NO) at
 temperatures ranging from  300 K to 2000 K and  pressures of 0.5 atm (50.7kPa) to 2.0
 atin (203kPa) are described with their design  considerations.  Methods for confirming
 nitric  oxide concentrations  are given.  The spectroscopic theory  for the absorption
 of ultraviolet radiation in  the y(0,0) band of nitric oxide is reviewed.  Experi-
 incntal  values for oscillator strengths and broadening parameters  for NO with various
 collision  partners are provided.  Experimental results confirming  the adequacy of  a
 ..umputer spectral model and,  hence, the calibration are presented  along with the
 details of the model.  Finally, the results of an empirical calibration of an
 infrared gas correlation spectrometer are given.

 The Nitric Oxide Measurement Study is in  three volumes:
 Optical Calibration -  Volume I;
 Probe Methods - Volume II;
 Comparison of Optical  and  Probe Methods - Volume III.
 17.  Keywords  Citric oxide,  ultraviolet
 spectroscopy,  high  temperature calibra-
 tion,  broadening parameters, oscillator
 strengths, spectroscopic model, infrared
 gas  correlation spectrometer.
               18.  Distribution Stotement
               Document  is available  to  public through
               the  National Technical Information
               Service,  Springfield,  VA    22161
 19.  Security Clossif. (of this report)

 Unclassified
  20. Security Clossif. (of this poge)

   Unclassified
    21. No. of Poges   22. Price
     222
Form DOT F 1700.7  (8-72)
Reproduction of completed poge authorized

-------
                                     ABSTRACT
     Calibration devices suitable for providing known amounts of nitric oxide
(NO) at temperatures ranging from 300 K to 2000 K and pressures of 0.5 atm
(50.7kPa) to 2.0 atm (203kPa) are described with their design considerations.
Methods for confirming nitric oxide concentrations are given.  The spectro-
scopic theory for the absorption of ultraviolet radiation in the y(0,0) band
of nitric oxide is reviewed.  Experimental values for oscillator strengths
and broadening parameters for NO with various collision partners are provided.
Experimental results confirming the adequacy of a computer spectral model and,
hence, the calibration are presented along with the details of the model.
Finally, the results of an empirical calibration of an infrared gas correlation
spectrometer are given.

-------
                                 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

     This contract was administered by the Federal Aviation Administration.
Funding for this work was provided by an Interagency Committee representing
the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Air Force, Navy, National Aeronautics
and Space Administration (NASA), and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

     The assistance of Mr.  D. Kocum, Mr. R. P. Smus, Mr. D. Santos, and Mr. R. L.
Poitras during the experimental portions of this study is gratefully acknowledged.
The authors also would like to acknowledge the contributions of the following
UTRC staff:  Dr. P. J. Marteney for his kinetics analysis during the calibration
source design phase; Mr. L. Chiappetta, Jr. and Dr. R. N. Guile for aerodynamic
analyses of the tnicroprobes; Mr. M. D. Page and R. E. LeBarre for programming;
Mr. R. Thornton and Mr. C.  Ekstrom for electronic instrumentation and Mrs.
Barbara Johnson for data reduction and report preparation.  Our thanks are extended
to A. Kondracki of the Standards Laboratory of Pratt and Whitney Aircraft for
certifying gas mixtures used in this study.

     In addition, we extend our thanks to Mr. J. Few and his colleagues at Arnold
Research Organization for providing us with their spectral computer model and
for their cooperation during their measurements made at UTRC.  Finally, thanks are
given to Dr. D. Gryvnak of Ford Aerospace for his infrared gas correlation measure-
ments.
                                       ii

-------
                         Nitric Oxide Measurement Study:
                                       Task__I
                               Optical Calibration
                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

                                                                        Page

ABSTRACT	i

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS	ii

LIST OF FIGURES	  iv

LIST OF TABLES	vi

I.   INTRODUCTION	1-1

II.  CALIBRATION DEVICES	H-l

     A.  Design Considerations	II-l
     B.  Description of Devices and Performance 	  II-8

III. ULTRAVIOLET ABSORPTION  	  III-l

     A.  Apparatus	III-l
     B.  Theoretical Development of Ultraviolet Absorption	111-10
     C.  Experimental Results  - Spectroscopic Measurements	111-28

IV.  DISCUSSION	IV-1

V.   SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS   	  V

REFERENCES	      R~1

APPENDIX A - Measuring NO in Aircraft Jet Exhausts by Gas-Filter
     Correlation Techniques, Task I 	  A-l

APPENDIX B - Comments on the Problems in The Previously Reported
     Spectral Model 	  B-l

APPENDIX C - Comments on the Experimental Technique of Wise and
     Freeh	C-l

APPENDIX D - UTRC Spectral Computer Program Description and Listing .   .  D-l
                                         iii

-------
                                 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure No.                                                               Page

     1      Equilibrium Values of NO at Various Initial Concentrations
            and Temperatures	   II-2
     2      Time for 5% of Initial NO Concentration to Decompose. .  .  .   H-4
     3      Schematic of Gas Handling System	   II-9
     4      Typical Calibration Curves for Critical Orifices	   11-10
     5      Stainless Steel Shroud and Assembly 	   11-12
     6      Calibration Assembly (Top View) 	   11-13
     7      Flowing Gas Heater	   11-15
     8      Normalized Concentration Profiles Along Optical Axis Over
            Flowing Gas Heater	   11-18
     9      NO Profiles Over Flowing Gas Heater at Different
            Temperatures	   11-20
     10     Typical Temperature Profiles Over Flowing Gas Heater at
            Elevated Temperature and Along Optical Axis 	   11-21
     11     Flat Flame Burner	   11-22
     12     Water-Cooled Quartz Microprobe	   11-24
     13     Tip of Quartz Microprobe	   11-25
     14     Thermocouple and Traverse Mechanism 	   11-26
     15     Ir/Ir-40% Rh Thermocouple and Support Wire	   11-27
     16     Normalized Concentration Profiles Over Flat Flame Burner.  .   11-36
     17     Horizontal Temperature Profiles Over Flat Flame Burner.  .  .   11-37
     18     Arrangement of Apparatus For Optical Measurements 	   III-2
     19     Water-Cooled Hollow-Cathode Lamp	   IIT-5
     20     Intensity Distribution in Narrow-Line Lamp	- . .  .  .   III-6
     21     Narrow-Line Lamp Emission	   III-7
     22     Emission from Fig. 21 After Absorption by 5 Torr 10% NO/Ar
            Over Path Length of 18.6 cm	   III-8
     23     Doppler Broadening (0.0005 nm) and Slit Function (0.0015 nm)   111-30
     24     NO Absorption Spectrum	   111-31
     25     NO Absorption Spectrum	   111-32
     26     NO Absorption Spectrum	   111-33
     27     NO Absorption Spectrum	   111-34
     28     NO Absorption Spectrum	   111-35
     29     Computer Spectrum 	   111-36
     30     Computer Spectrum 	   111-37
     31     Computer Spectrum 	   111-38
     32     Absorption by CO Coincident with ^(0,0) Band of NO	   111-41
     33     Spectrum Near PJ_J_ Bandhead	   111-42
     34     Computer Spectrum Near P^ Bandhead	   111-43
     35     Measured NO Broadening Parameter in Flames	   111-48
     36     Nitric Oxide Profiles Over Flowing Gas Heater at Elevated
            Temperatures	   111-53
                                        iv

-------
                            LIST OF FIGURES (Cont'd)

Figure No.                                                                Page

     37     Horizontal Temperature Profiles Over Flat Flame Burner.  .  .    111-55
     38     Horizontal Temperature Profiles Over Flat Flame Burner.  .  .    111-56
     39     Horizontal Temperature Profiles Over Flat Flame Burner.  .  .    111-57
     40     Horizontal Profiles of Major Species Over Flat Flame
            Burner	    111-58
     41     Horizontal Profiles of Major Species Over Flat Flame
            Burner	    111-59
     42     NO Horizontal Profile Over Flat Flame Burner (Cold Flow).  .    111-60

-------
LIST OF TABLES
Table No.
II-A

II-B


III-A
III-B
III-C
III-D
III-E
III-F
III-G
III-H

III-I

III-J

III-K

III-L
III-M
III-N
III-O
IV-A

Description of Sampling Probes Used Over The Flowing
Gas Heater and the Flat Flame Burner 	
Flow Conditions For Optical Measurements Over Flat
Flame Burner 	

Specifications For Gases 	
Bandheads in the y -System of Nitric Oxide 	
2
X TT State Constants for NO 	
2
A Z State Constants for NO 	
Notation for Transitions of NO 	
Spectral Lines Used For Broadening Measurements 	
2 2
Broadening Parameters for NO y(0,0) (A Z-X TT) Transitions .
Comparison of Collision Diameters for Broadening of NO
y(0,0) Lines 	
f\ f\
Oscillator Strengths for the NO y(0,0) (A I+-X IT) Band
For Different Gases 	
Oscillator Strengths (fQ Q) for the NO y(0,0) Band:
Literature Summary 	
Oscillator Strengths (fQ Q) for NO y(0,0) Band:
A Comparison 	
Static Cell Calibration Data (NO in N2) 	
Flowing Gas Heater (FGH) Optical Measurements 	
Continuum Lamp Transmissions for ^/Oo/Ar/NO Flat Flames. .
Flat Flame Burner Results 	
Comparison of Transmission Data ARO Lamp Versus UTRC Lamp .
Page

11-17

11-34

III-3
111-20
III-2A
111-26
111-27
111-40
111-44

111-46

111-49

111-50

111-52
111-62
111-63
111-65
111-66
IV-6
     vi

-------
                                   I.  INTRODUCTION
     Since Johnston (1971) and Crutzen (1970, 1972) independently suggested that the
injection of nitric oxide (NO) into the upper atmosphere could significantly diminish
the ozone (0-j) concentration, an accurate knowledge of the amount of NO emitted by
jet aircraft has been a serious concern to those involved in environmental studies.
This concern intensified when McGregor, Seiber, and Few (1972) reported that NO con-
centration measured by ultraviolet resonant spectroscopy were factors of 1.5 to 5.0
larger than those measured by extractive probe sampling with subsequent chemilumine-
scent analysis.  These initial measurements were made on a YJ93-GE-3 engine as part
of the Climatic Impact Assessment Program (CIAP) which was one of four studies (CIAP,
NAS, COMASA, COVOS (see References)) commissioned to determine the possible environ-
mental consequences of high altitude aircraft operation, especially supersonic air-
craft.  After those studies were initiated, economic factors strongly favored the
production and operation of subsonic aircraft.  Nevertheless, since the subsonic air-
craft fleet is large and does operate as high as the lower stratosphere, interest in
the causes of the discrepancies between the two NO measurement methods continued.
Few, Bryson, McGregor, and Davis (1975, 1976, 1977) reported a second set of measure-
ments on an experimental jet combustor (AVCO-Lycoming) where the spectroscopically
determined NO concentrations were factors of 3.5 to 6.0 higher than those determined
by the probe method.  In this set of measurements, optical data were obtained not only
across the exhaust plume but also in the sample line connecting the probe with the
chemiluminescent analyzer.  The sample line optical data seemed to agree with the chemi-
luminescent analyzer data; hence, it was suggested that the discrepancies were due to
phenomena occurring in the probe.  These results stimulated a third set of measurements
involving ultraviolet spectroscopy (Few et al, 1976a, 1976b), infrared gas correlation
spectroscopy  (D. Gryvnak, 1976a, 1976b) and probe sampling on an Allison T-56 combustor,
The measured ratios of the ultraviolet to the probe values typically ranged between
1.5 and 1.9 depending on the data reduction procedure.  The ratios of the infrared to
the probe values varied between 1.1 to 1.5 also depending on the method of data reduc-
tion.  In addition to these engine and combustor data, evidence supportive of the ac-
curacy of the ultraviolet spectroscopic method, i.e., calibration data and model pre-
dications, was presented by McGregor, Few, and Litton (1973); Davis, Few, McGregor
and Classman  (1976); and Davis, McGregor, and Few (1976).  Nevertheless, it was still
not possible to make a judgment on the relative accuracy of the spectroscopic and
probe methods.  The most significant reasons for this were:  the complexity of the
spectroscopic theory and computer model required to infer concentration from optical
transmission; the inadequate treatment of probe use; and the incomplete exhaust tem-
perature and pressure data which are necessary for a valid comparison of the methods.
Recently, Oliver et al (1977, 1978) as part of the High Altitude Pollution Program
has ranked these discrepancies as a major and a continuing source of uncertainty in
atmospheric model predictions.

     The purpose of this investigation was to identify and determine the magnitude of
                                           1-1

-------
 the  systematic errors associated with both the optical and probe sampling techniques
 for  measuring NO.  To accomplish this, the study was divided into three parts.  The
 first was devoted  to calibrating the ultraviolet and infrared spectroscopic methods.
 This entailed developing procedures which could provide known concentrations of NO
 over a wide range  of temperatures and pressures, and also reviewing and correcting
 the  ultraviolet  spectroscopic theory used in the engine and combustor measurements
 cited above.  The  second part of this study was focused on sample extraction, transfer,
 and  analysis by  chemiluminescent instrumentation.  The sampling methods were used on
 three successively more complicated combustion systems starting with a flat flame
 burner and culminating with a jet combustor.  The results are presented in TASK II
 Report:  Probe Methods .  In the third part of this study, optical measurements were
 made on  the same three combustion systems operated at the same conditions used for
 the  probe measurements.  The results of the optical and probe measurements were com-
 pared and are given in TASK III Report:  Comparison of Optical and Probe Methods.

      This report,  i.e,  TASK I,  covers the results  of  the first  part  of this  study.
 As  indicated above,  the  optical calibration entailed  several  steps which  will be
 briefly described below.

     The first was the selection and development of devices which would provide known
 concentrations of  NO from room  temperature to approximately 2000 K.   Known concentra-
 tions at pressures from subatmosphere to two atmospheres were also required but not
 over the above temperature range.  The selection of the devices was governed by the fol-
 lowing criteria.  NO decomposition through either hetero- or homogeneous processess was
 to be minimal (£ 10%) relative  to the discrepancies cited above.  Temperature and con-
 centration distributions were to be known along the optical path and stable during
 the  measurement.   The optical path and the concentrations were to be such that unam-
 biguous  optical  data would be obtained.

     The second  part of the calibration process started with the translation of a
 spectroscopic computer model developed and used at Arnold  Research Organization
 (ARO) by the authors cited above (McGregor, Davis,  Few. Classman).  This model was
 generously provided by J. D. Few and H. N. Classman.  After encountering serious
 deficiencies in  that model (see Appendix B), a new model was developed which was used
 to process both  resonant line and continuum source, ultravilet, spectroscopic data.  In
 addition, broadening parameters and oscillator strengths were experimentally determined.

     The third part of the calibration process was the actual verification of the new
model over the temperature range given above using a hollow cathode resonant lamp.
Measurements were  also performed by ARO personnel with a capillary discharge lamp.
These results are  described in an internal report by Few, Lowry, McGregor and Keefer
 (1979).   A review  of that report is included in Section IV.

     Finally, an empirical calibration of an infrared gas correlation spectrometer
was  performed.    The results of that calibration are presented by D.  Gryvnak of Ford
Aerospace in Appendix A.
                                         1-2

-------
                             II.  CALIBRATION DEVICES


                             A.  Design Considerations

II.A.I  NO Decomposition, Equilibrium and Kinetic Considerations

     The complexity of the problem of providing known concentrations of nitric
oxide at elevated temperatures and given pressures may be demonstrated by the
paradoxical predictions of equilibrium theory for the reaction


                            2NO ± N2 + 02                      (1)

Assuming infinite time is available and an initial mixture of NO in nitrogen,
equilibrium values of NO may be calculated using mass balance and the equilib-
rium constant K^ = PN  x pQ /p2m = 5.06 x 10~2 exp(+21,700/T) (determined
from JANAF tables).  In Figure 1, where ratios of equilibrium to initial values
are plotted, it is shown that as temperature decreases from 2000K,  the amount
of decomposition becomes greater.  Equilibrium data, in fact, predict that NO
in N2 mixtures successfully used in calibrating analytical instruments should
not be useful.  Clearly equilibrium information, by itself, is inadequate since
kinetics play the dominant role.  Indeed, the problem of decomposition is most
severe at elevated temperatures.

     Nevertheless, Figure 1 suggests that calibration procedures and apparatus
must be selected carefully if problems caused by equilibrium conditions are to be
avoided.  Fortunately, the rate of destruction of NO is limited by chemical
kinetics, which in turn is dependent on local temperature, pressure, and the
presence of other reactive species and/or surfaces.  In fact, at room tempera-
ture the homogeneous reaction rate is so slow that pure NO can be stored under
pressure for indef initeperiods with negligible conversion to N20, N02 and 02-
Alternatively, much NO can be lost in short periods of time in the presence
of a catalyst or a reactive surface such as copper or even other gaseous
species such as oxygen where NO may be lost via the reaction.

                               NO + NO + 02 + 2N02            (2)

Furthermore, it is clear that only through careful consideration of the rate
of chemical kinetics (both homo- and heterogeneous) can wide variations of
temperature and concentration conditions be provided for NO calibration.  A
literature review of both the homogeneous and heterogeneous reactions (e.g.,
Wise and Freeh (1952), Yuan et al. (1959), McCullough (1975X Kaufman and Kelso
(1955), Winter (1971), Shelef and Kummer (1969), and Fraser and Daniels (1958)),
suggests three temperature regimes for the decomposition of NO at atmospheric
pressure:  (1) below 1000K, heterogeneous kinetics dominate, (2) above 1400K
homogeneous reactions dominate, and (3) between 1000 and 1400K a transition
region exists.  The size, i.e., temperature window of the transition region
for a given experiment depends, of course, on the reactivity and surface area
of exposed walls, the concentration of NO, and the identity of any third body
(diluent) if present.

                                         II-l

-------
                                                                               FIG. 1


EQUILIBRIUM VALUES OF NO AT VARIOUS INITIAL CONCENTRATIONS AND TEMPERATURES
                                      TEMPERATURE (K)
                    2000
                                                                           700
         D
         O
         LU
        O
                                               100 ppm NO IN N2


                                               1000 ppm NO IN N2

                                               5000 ppm NO IN N,
           10
             -4
                                                                            79-O4-54-1
                                         II-2

-------
     Of  the  several reports on the homogeneous  (thermal) decomposition of NO,
perhaps  the  most comprehensive is the recent work by McCullough  (McCullough
(1975),  McCullough  et al. (1977)).   In  this work, mixtures of NO  in Ar (100
ppm -  5%) were  passed through a packed  ceramic  flow reactor at temperatures
between  1500 and 2100K at  atmospheric pressure.  In addition to presenting
a detailed chain mechanism for the decomposition of NO, this work provides
experimental data for NO  thermal decomposition  at the concentration levels of
interest in  the present study, i.e., 100-5000 ppm.  Assuming that the effective
dead volume  in  McCullough's reactor  is  2.75 cm^ (estimated from this published
data and using  McCullough1s decomposition data), the time for 5% loss of the
initial  NO can  be computed.  The results are shown in Fig. 2 for several
temperatures and concentration levels.  A reduction of _<^ 10% during test time
is considered to be the objective of the calibration system.

II.A.2.  High Temperature  Calibration

     These data suggest that an apparatus capable of providing a calibrated
source of nitric oxide up  to 2000K must be able to heat the NO within several
milliseconds and continually replace the decomposing NO with freshly heated
NO.  Otherwise, the stationary nitric oxide would undergo thermal decomposition
during the period of calibration, which for the infrared (IR) system nay
be 5 to  10 minutes.  Even  for the ultraviolet (UV) measurements, a minute or
so is  required.  Since a  flow system appears necessary in order to continually
replace  the  heated NO, a  static heated  cell would clearly be impractical.
Several  other calibration  devices can immediately be eliminated for high
temperature  use.  For example, NO can be premixed with an inert carrier and
then heated  by  flowing it  through a hot furnace or heat exchanger.  This
technique, unfortunately,  is not feasible since the time required for heating
of the gas will be on the  order of seconds.  Several methods of preheating the
carrier  gas  and then injecting cold NO  prior to the optical measurement were
also considered, e.g., a plasma torch.  However, in these cases characteristic
times of diffusion, i. e. ,  mixing, were found to be limiting.  A shock tube has
the advantage of elevating the gas temperature nearly instantaneously (micro-
seconds) but insufficient  time is available (only several hundred milliseconds)
for calibration before a reflected or rarefraction wave changes the gas
temperature  and pressure.

     The most viable alternative which would both heat the NO within several milli-
seconds and  continually supply freshly heated NO is a lean H2/02/Ar flame seeded
with NO.  Argon rather than nitrogen is selected as the diluent since it  would
prevent additional formation of NO via the Zeldovich (1947) reactions.

     This technique has,  in fact, been used successfully at UTRC (Seery,  et al
(1979))  in l/10th atmosphere flames using molecular beam sampling and by Kaskan
and Hughes (1973).   This previous work  indicated that NO would not be lost in
the reaction zone of a lean H2/Oo flame.  To investigate the conservation of NO
                                       II-3

-------
                                                                         FIG. 2
  TIME FOR 5% OF INITIAL NO CONCENTRATION TO DECOMPOSE
             CURVES ESTIMATED FROM MCCULLOUGH (1975) DATA
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
                          100 ppm NO IN Ar
                   1000 ppm
                   10,000 ppm
   1600        1700
1800          1900
       T(K)
                                                     2000          2100
                                                                      79-04-54-2

-------
 In a post  flame  region where optical measurements would be made,  decomposition
 reactions  and  their  rates were  examined.  These  calculations predict  that NO
 decomposition  should be  small immediately above  a lean H2/02/Ar flame at
 atmospheric pressure.  Due  to the very wide  flammability limits of a hydrogen/
 oxygen  flame,  it  is  expected that a flat flame burner could be used as a
 calibration device over  the temperature range 1000-2000K.  In addition, this
 device  is  particularly suitable since in Tasks II and III of this program, a
 flat flame burner using  methane for fuel is  needed.

 II. A. 3.  Low Temperature Calibration
     Given  that a I^/On/Ar flat flame can be employed for NO calibration from
1000-2000K,  the lower temperature range, 300-1000K with possibly some tempera-
ture overlap remains to be considered.  A literature review indicates that
heterogeneous reactions in the absence of high concentrations of reactive
radicals  dominate below HOOK.  Unfortunately agreement on overall reaction
rates  and heterogeneous mechanisms  is generally so poor that Shelef and Kummer
 (1969)  remarked in  their  summary of catalytic reduction of NO,

          "It is truly so  that catalysis is an art rather than a
          science and although those working in catalysis are
          impelled to offer plausible mechanisms for the catalytic
          process based on kinetic and other data, these attempts
          often fall very  short of exact mechanistic descriptions
          of  surface processes involved.  We can indicate broadly
          those solid surfaces that will be of use in the catalytic
          reactions of NO but it will require many more experiments
          before we can hope to formulate the theory that will
          enable us to predict in advance the catalytic behavior
          of  a given surface for these important reactions."

     Conclusions generally differ,  for example, with regard to the experimental
reaction  order for which  values of  zero (Yuan, et al (1959), and Eraser and
Daniels  (1958)), one (Winter  (1971)), and two (Wise and Freeh, (1952)) have
been obtained.  Here, the reaction  order, n, is defined by the overall rate law.

                         '     =-k[NO]n                        (3)
                         dt

where k is the effective rate constant which in general depends on temperature,
reaction order, surface material, and active or available surface sites.  The
reaction order, in turn, may depend on NO concentration, temperature, surface
material, and available surface sites.  For example, Wise and Freeh (1952)
show that, by doubling the surface to volume ratio, the overall decomposition
rate doubles at 900K.  [NO],  in Eq.  3, represents the concentration of nitric oxide.
                                       II-5

-------
     To reduce reaction rates, it is clear that total surface area should be
minimized and that a relatively inactive surface should be used.  Porous
surfaces should be avoided due to relatively high total surface areas.  One
measurement  (Fraser and Daniels,  (1958) using nitrogen absorption and the
Brunauer, Emmett anJ Teller  (BET) theory (Brunauer, et al (1938)), indicates
that the total surface area of typical metal oxides are approximately thirty
times their macroscopic surface areas.  Polished quartz or glazed ceramic,
of course, would provide ideal surfaces due to their smooth surfaces and
well-known low catalytic activity.  Considerable experimental data are
available on ceramic materials such as alumina (AJ^Os) or zirconia (Zr02)l
however, the surfaces are not glazed and NO pressures are typically much
higher  (approximately 10-500 torr) than the pressures of interest in this work
(1000 ppm of NO in one atmosphere of N2 is equivalent to .76 torr) .   Extra-
polation of this decomposition data to the desired conditions of the present
work, i.e., low initial NO concentrations and small surface areas must be
questionable, especially in light of the comments by Shelef and Kummer.   In
fact, direct application of their equations 
-------
     If Wise and Freeh's conclusions are accepted, then a static quartz cell
could be used up to 1100 K only, of course, if extreme care is taken so as to
avoid exposure to any other materials within the heated cell and no gaseous
impurities such as oxygen are present.  Since the previously published report
is in question, a simple alternative might be to construct a heated quartz cell
and flow mixtures of NO in a carrier through the cell.  Although this approach
was considered, it was decided that uncertainties in temperature profiles
(radial and axial) .and difficulties in probing together make this approach
undesirable.

     Several other systems were considered where the carrier gas is preheated
and then the NO injected in a mixing zone just upstream of the optical measure-
ment.  All of these designs, however, were subject to limitations by characteris-
tic diffusional rates and, therefore, could not be recommended.  An alternative
system was conceived in which the nitric oxide and carrier gas is premixed and
then heated prior to the optical measurement up to the temperatures of interest.
The gas is heated using a quartz bed heat exchanger.  Quartz is used to mini-
mize catalytic activity.  This concept appeared to have several advantages.
First, uniform mixing of NO with the carrier would not be a problem.  Second,
a design could be selected to be compatible with the flat flame burner and,
consequently, much of their support facilities would be identical and could
be used for either configuration.  Furthermore, the flowing gas would be easily
accessible to probe measurements of concentration, and temperature.  This cali-
bration device, entitled the flowing gas heater (FGH), seemed to be most practical
for the lower temperature range (300-1000 K) .  Details of design and operating
characteristics are described in a following section.

     At room temperature, a static cell should also be used.  With this device,
concentration and temperature profiles are well-defined and a variety of experi-
ments can be performed including broadening measurements using several different
gases, and comparison of results from certified gas mixtures and from mixtures
made on site.  This device is described in Section III.A.I.

     In summary, the approach for calibration of the optical measurement for
nitric oxide includes the use of three devices:  1)  a static cell at room tem-
perature, 2) a flowing gas heater for the temperature range 300-1000 K, and 3)
a flat flame burner with a H2/02/Ar flame useful in the temperature range
1000-2000 K.  Items two and three were constructed with similar geometry so
that either could be installed in a central facility which allows for optical,
thermocouple, and probe access.  This facility is provided with a gas handling
system.
                                       II-7

-------
                     B.  Description of Devices and Performance

II.B.I. Central Gas Facility

     The central facility includes a gas-handling system and a water-cooled shroud
to contain the gas flow.  The former consists of necessary plumbing that blends
various mixtures of gases for feeding both the flat flames and the flowing gas
heater.  Separate blending facilities were constructed for the main and buffer
gas flows.  The stainless steel shroud has mounts for thermocouple and gas
sampling probes and provides for optical access.

     A diagram of the gas handling system is depicted in Fig.  3.   The gases used
in these experiments were argon (Ar) , nitrogen C^) ,  oxygen (02) ,  methane (CH^) ,
hydrogen (H2), carbon dioxide (C02), nitric oxide (NO),  and two mixtures of
nitric oxide and argon.  The mixtures were approximately 10 percent NO, 90 per-
cent Ar, and 25 percent NO, 75 percent Ar.  For each mix ratio, several bottles
were purchased and, for each bottle, the vendor (Scientific Gas Co.)  specified
the ratio and certified the percentages to within jf 2 percent  of  their stated
values.  The concentrations were verified to within approximately  3 percent,  using
both mass spectrometric (MS) and chemiluminescent analysis (CA).   In the latter
case, since NO concentrations of 10 percent and 25 percent cannot  be easily
measured using a standard CA, the mix ratios were verified by  diluting the gas
using the gas-handling system and comparing results using the  same analysis
techniques with gravimetrically-prepared mixtures of NO  in Ar  (Scott)  and with
mixtures prepared from pure NO and Ar.

     Flow rates of gases were controlled by using orifices, metering valves,  and
0-150 psig pressure gauges.  The gauges are 8V diameter gauges-from Wallace
and Tiernan and are accurate to within + 0.15 psi.  The  orifices were all
operated at critical flow and ranged in diameter from 0.0015"  to  .050".  The
combination of orifices, pressure gauges, and metering valves  allowed the
accurate control of flows ranging from 8xlO~  to 3.5 grams/sec of  ^2-   The
stability of the flow system was enhanced by using two stage regulators upstream
of the metering valves.  Although pressures and temperatures were  continuously
monitored,only occasional adjustment of the metering valves was required.
                   »
     Orifices less than .025" size were all jeweled orifices (Swiss Jewel Co. and
Brockton Jewel Co.), mounted in brass and aluminum discs and the discs were
mounted in 1/2-in. stainless steel fittings.  Larger orifices  were machined and
placed in fittings.  Flow calibrations were made using a 3-liter  wet test meter
(CGA/Precision Scientific)  for flows less than 0.3 grams/sec (N~) .  A calibrated
volume was used for larger flow rates and for hazardous  gases.  Typical calibra-
tion curves are shown in Fig. 4.  Although most of the calibrations were performed
using nitrogen, several measurements were made using each of the  other gases  in
                                       II-R

-------
                                                                                 FIG. 3
                     SCHEMATIC OF GAS HANDLING SYSTEM
CARRIER (N2OR Ar)
                                                                TOGGLE VALVES
     METERING VALVES
                                          CRITICALORIFICE
CARRIER (N2 OR Ar)
METHANE
OXYGEN
                               T/C
                                T/C
                                    -o-
                                                                 BUFFER GAS FLOW
                                T/C
                                                                            79-04-54-18
                                       II-9

-------
                                    TYPICAL CALIBRATION CURVES FOR CRITICAL ORIFICES
               O.:io
          o
          u
          LU
cr


LU
i-

cr

5
o
          CO
          co
               0.08  —
               0.06  —
                          ORIFICE DIAMETER



                             O 0.008 IN.


                             D 0.050 IN.
               0.04  	
               0.02  —
i
g
                                                    60          80          100



                                                     ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (PSIA)
                                                                            120
140
                  CM
                  z
                  u.
                  o

                  o
                  LU
                  CO

                  e/5
                                                                                                                   en
160


-------
these experiments.  Correction factors between N2 and other gases for a given
orifice were within 3 percent of those predicted by the equation (derived from
Shapiro, 1953),
                                2  N2
where the subscripts x and N2 refer to the two gases of interest; m is the mass
flow rate; y is the ratio of specific heats; and MW is the molecular weight.  This
equation was used when experimental data for a given gas and orifice were unavail-
able.  Discharge coefficients were assumed to be similar.

     Pressures downstream of the orifices were continually monitored to ensure that
the orifices, indeed, were choked.  Pressure ratios (P   .     /P,    .     ) were
                    '                                 upstream  downstream
always 3.0 or greater while approximately 2.0 is required to maintain choked flow.

     Calibration curves were repeatable to within 2% (usually  to within less  than
1%) for measurements using either the wet test meter or the calibrated  volume.
Measurements using both techniques for the same orifice were within 3%.  The  un-
certainty associated with blending a mixture was primarily  dependent on the
uncertanties in the orifice calibrations (-3%), pressure readings (-0.5%)  and the
vendor certified and cross-checked Ar/NO mixture (<3%).
     For the nitric oxide feed lines, the tubing, fittings, and valves were con-
structed of stainless steel to minimize corrosion of the lines and loss of  NO to
surface reactions.

     Once the gases mixed, their transit time to the test rigs was less than one-
half second.  Oxygen was added just prior to the flat flame burner to minimize the
total volume of a combustible gas mixture and to reduce the effect of the reaction.
                               NO+NO+02	-2N02                             (2)
     The shroud and other support facilities are depicted in Fig.  5.   Its purpose
is to contain the gas flow and to prevent outside air currents from disturbing
the flow.  It is essentially a rectangular box constructed of stainless steel, is
open at both ends, and has internal dimensions of 22 cm long, 14 cm wide, and 26 cm
high.  Copper tubing is silver soldered on the outside for water cooling.  A large
(12.5 x 5 cm) port covered by quartz is installed on one side to view the quartz
bed and flames.  A top view is shown in Fig. 6.
                                         11-11

-------
STAINLESS STEEL SHROUD AND ASSEMBLY
                                                             FIG. 5
                                                      SAMPLE
                                                        LINE
                                                      PRESSURE
                                     SAMPLE PROBE TRAVERSE
                                      GENERAL VIEWING PORT
                                    THERMOCOUPLE TRAVERSE
                    OPTICAL VIEWING POFH
                                                      79-04-64-20
                 11-12

-------
                                          CALIBRATION ASSEMBLY (TOP VIEW)
                                  BUFFER ZONE-
                                                                      • S.S. SHROUD



INE
GAS P
1


RT
URGE
1


MAIN GAS FLOW —^
(SEEDED W/NO)
\


X
	 r 	

X

;<



/


1





>


QUARTZ WINDOWS— V
" !
1
1
^^s— DEAD SPACE

                                                                                            SCALE
I
g
I
u
                                                                                             5 cm


-------
     Tubes (3.4 cm i.d.) are welded on opposite ends of the shroud to mount the
optical windows and to protect the optical grade quartz or salts flats from the
flame environment.  Purge ports were attached to these tubes to flush out any
residual nitric oxide and to prevent gaseous diffusion of NO into these colder
regions.  The gas exit from these tubes was 1.3 cm in diameter.

     A thermocouple mount and traversing mechanism were attached to the outside
wall of the shroud directly above one of the tubes.  The thermocouple bead could
be placed at the same height as the optical beam.   The traversing mechanism allowed
for free movement (x + y translation) throughout a given horizantal plane.
Accuracy of positioning in both the x and y directions was approximately + 1 mm
relative and 4- 4 mm absolute.

     The probe mount and traversing mechanism for  the gas sample probes were mounted
outside the shroud.  The probe mount could be adjusted vertically approximately
1 cm.  This movement was sufficient to position the probe tip at the height of
the optical axis.  A traversing mechanism was purchased which allowed for x-y move-
ment throughout a given vertical plane and with a  relative accuracy of + 0.1 mm.
Probes were positioned with 4- 3 mm absolute accuracy.

II.B.2.  Flowing Gas Heater

     A cut-away view of the flowing gas heater is  shown in Fig. 7.  As previously
mentioned, the FGH was designed to be a low temperature calibration device with
a quartz heat exchanger.  Ceramic heaters (Electro-Applications), which are capa-
ble of reaching 1480 K, heat the quartz bed primarily by radiative heat trans-
fer.  The quartz bed is contained by a long, rectangular quartz tube (17.4 x 9.2
x 255 cm) open at the top and necked down to a 2.5 cm diameter tube at the bottom.
Inside are cylindrical quartz tubes ranging in diameter from 5 to 15 mm o.d. with
the largest at the bottom and with their sizes gradually decreasing to the top.
From the bottom of the heat exchanger, two chromel-alumel thermocouples in alumina
sleeves were inserted to monitor internal bed temperatures.  Several other Cr-Al
thermocouples were mounted on the outside of the quartz wall using a ceramic paste.

     The buffer zone was between the quartz wall and the internal sides of the
ceramic heaters.  Its equivalent area was 84 crn^.   A buffer zone was designed to
provide a region that would have similar gas temperature as the main flow yet be
void of nitric oxide.  The gas flowing through the buffer zone was always the
same as the carrier gas in the main stream.  The buffer region was sealed on the
bottom by a horizontal quartz plate.  Four vertical ceramic lieaters were cemented
in place and were surrounded by a stainless steel  heat shield (reflector) and
approximately 10 cm of insulation.

     Due to its bulk and to material constraints the flowing gas heater could not
be raised or lowered once in position.  All profiles (temperature and concentration)
                                       11-14

-------
                                 FLOWING GAS HEATER
                                                                                    FIG. 7
BUFFER
  ZONE
QUARTZ
                                                           MAIN FLOW
                                    \r OR N2 ]
                                                  •NO
                                                                              STAINLESS
                                                                              STEEL
                                                                              HEAT SHIELD
                                                                              79-04-54-4
                                          11-15

-------
were obtained at a fixed location above the gas exit of the quartz heat
exchanger.  This distance (6.5 cm) was at the height of the optical axis.

     1 1 . B . 2 . a .  P.robe_ Mea surement_s_

     Several probes of differing design were made in order to access various
portions  of the optical path above the flowing gas heater.  These uncooled probes
are described briefly in Table II -A; where applicable, figures that show profiles
of NO concentrations also indicate the probe(s) used to obtain the data.

     The  extracted gas samples were analyzed either with a mass spectrometer or
a chemiluminescence analyzer.  Details of these analyses systems and the corres-
ponding sampling trains are given at the end of this section.
     1 1 . B . 2 . b .  _T emp_er a_ t u_r^ Mea suremen _t_s_

     Gas  temperatures above the flowing gas heater were measured using a chromel-
alumel  thermocouple.  Wires were 0.010 inches in diameter while the diameter of the
junction  is approximately 0.015 inches.  Lead wires pass through an alumina rod
approximately 30 cm long mounted on the traversing mechanism at the side wall of
the shroud.  The thermocouple bead was supported 3.0 cm below the ceramic rod.
Millivolt outputs were measured using a Data Precision Model 3500 DVM with a
room temperature junction.  Radiation corrections were calculated and found to
be insignificant.

     1 1 . B . 2 . c .   j£x£e£iinen. tal_Resu_ l_t s_

     Tests were made to investigate NO conservation at room temperature and NO pro-
files across the length of the optical axis.  A typical profile is shown in Fig. 8.
The loss of approximately 8 percent NO from the seed value, which is calculated
from relative flow rates, is apparently due to a small percentage of intermixing of
the buffer and main flows.  For these profiles and for all data presented in this
report,  the window purge was on at a flow rate of .0109 moles/sec (.0043 moles/
sec/cm ) of nitrogen.   For all calibration experiments, the molar flow rate of
the carrier and buffer zones were held constant at .109 and .0164 moles/sec
          /               _/              2
(6.8 x 10   and 1.95 x 10   moles/sec/cm ) respectively.  These values are in-
dependent of molecular weight of the carrier gas or exit temperature of the
quartz  bed.   Under these conditions, the gas residence time within the quartz
heat exchanger is approximately three seconds.

     Elevated  gas temperatures were achieved by applying power to the ceramic
heaters.  Periodically, the flow rate of the carrier would be increased to the
desired  flow conditions for comparison of the actual gas temperatures to the
desired  test conditions.  Two hours were generally required to reach peak
operating temperatures due to the large riass and, therefore, large thermal
                                      11-16

-------
                                TABLE II-A

                  Description of Sampling Probes Used Over
              The Flowing Gas Heater and The Flat Flame Burner
Probe
A
B(D
C
D
E(2)
F(3)
Material
Quartz
Quartz
Quartz
Quartz
Stainless
Steel
Stainless
Steel
Internal
Diameter
(mm)
5
5
4
5
1.2
1.2
Water Cooled
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Orifice
inches
.025
.006
.012
.035
.047
.047
Diameter
(microns)
(635)
(150)
(305)
(890)
(1200)
(1200)
(1)   Photographs in Figs.  12 and 13.

(2)   Probe inserted horizontally into the sampling region through the
     optical ports which had their windows replaced with aluminum plates
     with a small hole for the  probe.

(3)   Probe inserted vertically  down the center of the shroud but  had a
     right angle bend at the height of the optical axis.
                                   11-17

-------
                     NORMALIZED CONCENTRATION PROFILES ALONG OPTICAL AXIS OVER FLOWING GAS HEATER
00
     I
     g
     I
     2
        Q
        IXI
        z
        o
        z
           1.0
           0.8
0.6
        LU

        J  0.4
        CM
        Z

        O



           0.2
0.0 _
 -10
                                                           AVG TEMP = 300K

                                                                  PROBE DESIGN

                                                                      D


                                                          3/31/78
                                                          4/3/78


                                                          10/11/78


                                                          CHEMI
                                                           E


                                                           F


                                                           D


                                                           D'
                                                              _L
                                                           _L
         -8-6-4-20        2        4        6

                                           DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                                                                                               10
12
14
16
                                                                                                                           P
                                                                                                                           oo

-------
inertia of the heaters and surrounding insulation.  Peak gas temperatures that
were achieved were slightly above 850 K.  Higher temperatures were prevented
primarily by local hot spots in the ceramic heaters which underwent thermal
runaway before other portions of the heaters had reached their peak temperatures.
The cause of the runaway was most likely due to nonuniformities (bends or
connections) in the alloy heating wires.

     Normalized concentration profiles of nitric oxide at low and at elevated
temperatures are compared in Fig. 9.  Two prominent features are apparent.  First
of all, nitric oxide is conserved within the quartz heat exchanger.  Although
these data were obtained using the chemiluminescence analysis system, similar
results were obtained with the mass spectrometer and its sampling system.  Secondly,
the wings (8.5 to 11 cm from the centerline) contain noticeably less nitric oxide
at elevated temperature than at room temperature.  This difference appears to be
real since profiles obtained at many different dates exhibit this phenomena.  It
is believed that the difference in the wings is due primarily to a reduction in
the available time for mixing of the main and buffer flows at elevated temperatures.
The reduction is due to a velocity increase that is proportional to temperature.

     When heated to gas temperatures above 500 K, it was found that power input to
the quartz bed was insufficient to maintain constant temperatures.  This problem
existed in spite of the fact that even at 1/2 power (2.4 kW), the ceramic heaters
provided sufficient power, in theory, to elevate the gas from room temperature to
800 K.   Consequently stable temperature profiles above 500 K could only be main-
tained for 10-15 minutes.  Furthermore, "temperature waves" could be observed
within the quartz bed itself, depending on the immediate history of heating and/or
cooling cycles.  Consequently, temperature profiles were obtained for each set of
experiments performed at elevated temperatures.  A typical profile is shown in
Fig. 10.

II.B.3.  Flat Flame Burner

     A photograph of the flat flame burner is shown in Fig. 11.  Its surface is
sintered copper constructed by Thermit, Inc.  Otherwise the burner is made of
sheet copper with two separate zones:   the main,  NO-seeded zone and the buffer
zone.  Imbedded in the 5/8" thick sintered surface are copper coils for water
cooling.  The inside dimensions for the region of the main gas flow was 17.5 x
                <^
9.2 cm or 161 cm.   The buffer zone is slightly smaller than for the flowing
gas heater with an effective area of 76 cm .  The flow systems feeding both the
buffer and main zones at the bottom of the burner were described earlier.

     11. B . 3 . a.  Pr obj2 Mea^sur_emen_t^

     For gas sampling over the flat flame, water cooled quartz probes were used.
Similar designs were used both for the MS analysis and for detection via CA.
                                       11-19

-------
                                                       FIG. 9
NO PROFILES OVER FLOWING GAS HEATER
     AT DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES
                O 753K
                O 293K
                PROBE D
                  CHEMI
             468
          DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
12
                                                     79-04-54-5
                  11-20

-------
               TYPICAL TEMPERATURE PROFILES OVER FLOWING GAS HEATER AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURE
                                             AND ALONG OPTICAL AXIS
                                                   O RUN NO 36
                                                   A RUN NO 43
(D
I
g
I
ID
              800
              700 -
              600 -
            a:
            LLI
              500 -
              400 -
300
 -12    -10
                                    -6
                                           -4-20       2      4
                                              POSITION FROM CENTERLINE (CM)
8     10
                                                                                                   12
                                                                                                           P
                                                                                                           o

-------
                                         FLAT FLAME BURNER
                                                           MAIN ZONE
                                                                    BUFFER ZONE
4

-------
The primary difference was the orifice size.  To feed the mass spectrometer, both
low sampling pressure and very little sample volume are required.  For mass
spectrometric analysis, probe tips were small, approximately 150 microns in
diameter  (several tips were made due to occasional breakage and/or devitrification)
A typical probe and tip (probe B in Table II-A) are shown in Figs. 12 and 13,
respectively.   (Although Figure 13 presents an illusion, the water-in tube is
indeed placed to one side of the gas sample tube).  The CA required much larger
flow rates and  a tip opening of 635 microns in diameter was used.

     The  large diameter of the water cooled probes prevented sampling of the
flame closer than 1.5 cm from the wall of the shroud.  To sample the gas in this
region close to the wall an uncooled quartz probe (C) of 6 mm o.d. was constructed.
This probe was only used on a low temperature flame so that catalytic activity on
the hot quartz wall and divitrification of the quartz would both be minimized.

     It should be pointed out that calculations using the UTRC probe deck were
performed for the quartz probes.  Although details of the program will be described
in the Task II report, it is worthwhile mentioning an important prediction.   For
the microprobes, of approximately 150 microns in diameter, aerodynamic quenching
of the gas sample is impossible, even at back pressures of '^ 10 torr used in this
work.  The limiting factor is the growth of the boundary layer which prevents the
flow from accelerating supersonically. [Although plans are being made to test this
prediction on an atmospheric  pressure flame, limited measurements made in a flame
at 76 torr (Seery, unpublished, 1978)  suggest that the mass flow rate varies  with
back pressure even down to a pressure ratio of 10].  This pressure ratio should
be compared with the ratio of 2 to 1, which is normally believed to be sufficient
to choke the flow.   These conclusions may have practical implications to many
flame researchers who have believed previously that their microprobes were aero-
dynamically quenched even with pressure ratios as low as 2 or 3 to 1.

     11. B. 3. b.  ^T emperatlire N_ea. svaremeivt s_

     For the flat flame burner, temperatures were monitored with a buttwelded
Ir/60% Ir-40% Rh thermocouple (.003" wires)  coated with a mixture of 10% beryllium
oxide and 90% yttrium oxide.  Kent (1970), has found that a mixture of these
metal oxides provides a good non-catalytic coating for thermocouples above
2000 K.  The bead with its coating had a total diameter of .0035" - .0005"
and was approximately 1.2 cm away from either lead/support wire (.010" diameter).

     Photographs of the thermocouple assembly and a close up of the yoke are shown
in Figs.  14 and 15.   Millivolt output was measured using a DVM and converted to
temperatures uncorrected for radiation using published tables (Blackburn and
Caldwell,  1962).

     Estimates of radiation corrections were calculated by equating the heat
transfer from the gas stream to total radiation
                                       11-23

-------
                                        WATER-COOLED QUARTZ MICROPROBE
                                                                           GAS SAMPLE EXIT-
i
NJ
  t




  u
  M

P



rsj

-------
                                         TIP OF QUARTZ MICROPROBE
               WATER OUT
g
2


-------
                                THERMOCOUPLE AND TRAVERSE MECHANISM
                                                                       THERMOCOUPLE-
2
K>


-------
                                    lr/lr-40%Rh THERMOCOUPLE AND SUPPORT WIRE
i
ro
  
-------
             h (Tg - TT.C.> = e 0 .,.,.  The
molar fractions of gas (X) obtained from the flow calculations were used in the
above determinations.
                                       11-28

-------
     Properties of the individual gases were obtained from JANAF tables (C ),
Hanley (1973) (y and A for Ar) and Svehla  (1962)  (y and X for all other gases).

     Due to the uncertainties in the emissivity calculation of transport properties
of mixtures, and bead diameter, it is estimated that the calculation of AT
(= T  - T    ) is accurate to within 20-25 percent.
    O    1 • Li •

     11. B. 3 . c.  j£xhau_s t^ _AnaJL%_zer__

     The Scott Model 119 Exhaust Analyzer used in this present investigation pro-
vides for the simultaneous analysis of CO, C02, NO or N02, Q^ and total hydrocarbons
(THC).  The analyzer is an integrated system, with flow controls for sample, zero
and calibration gases conveniently located on the control panel.  The incoming gas
sample passes through a refrigeration condenser (^275K), to remove residual
water vapor.  As the sample passes from the condenser, it is filtered to remove
particulate matter.  The system is comprised of five different analytical instru-
ments.  Beckman Model 315B Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR) Analyzers are used to
measure the CO and C02 concentrations in the gas sample.  Concentration ranges
available on the CO analyzer were from 0-200 ppm to 0-15% on several scales.
Concentration ranges available on the C0? analyzer were 0-4% and 0-16%.  The
accuracy of the NDIR analyzers is nominally +_ 1% of full scale.  A Scott Model 125
Chemiluminescence Analyzer is used to measure the NO and N0~ concentrations in the
gas sample.  Concentration ranges available with this instrument were from 0-1 ppm
to 0-10,000 ppm on several scales, with a nominal + 1% of full scale accuracy.  The
thermal converter used in the chemiluminescent analyzer was stainless steel, and
was operated at a temperature of approximately 1000 K.  A Scott Model 150 Para-
magnetic Analyzer is used to measure the 02 concentration in the gas sample.  Con-
centration ranges available with this instrument were from 0-1% to 0-25% on
several scales, with a nominal accuracy of + 1% of full scale.  A Scott Model 116
Total Hydrocarbon Analyzer is used to measure the hydrocarbon concentration in
the gas sample.  This analyzer utilizes an unheated flame ionization detection
system to provide for measurement of hydrocarbons (as carbon)  in concentration
ranges from 0-1 ppm to 0-10%, with a nominal accuracy of +_ 1% of full scale.
Output signals from the various analyzers are displayed on chart recorders and
a digital display.

     For those flows in which Ar was the bulk or carrier gas,  the chemiluminescent
analyzer was calibrated with a gravimetrically prepared NO in Ar standard..
This instrument can also be calibrated with NO in N2 standards; however a correc-
tion factor of 1.20 must be applied to the indicated reading.   This difference
in calibration is primarily due to viscous effects in the instrument sample
capillary and varying quenching efficiencies between Ar and N2.  These effects
have been recently analyzed (Dodge, et al. 1979).
                                       II-29

-------
     Gas samples were transferred to the SCOTT analysis instruments through a
four meter (13 feet) sampling line purchased from Technical Heaters, Inc.
This sampling line was constructed with an electrical heater including thermo-
couple and had a TFE teflon core of .48 cm (3/16 in.) internal diameter-   For
measurements over the flowing gas heater, samples were extracted using an un-
cooled quartz probe (D) with an orifice diameter of 890 microns (0.035 in.).
Typical sampling line pressures and temperatures were 500 torr (^2/3 atm)
and 300 K respectively.  Under these conditions, the calculated residence time
in the sampling line is approximately 3/4 seconds (mass flow is assumed to be
50 percent of choked flow).  For sampling from the flame, probe A was used with
an orifice of 635 microns (0.025 in.).  Using lower pressures and elevated
temperatures of 380 torr (1/2 atm) and 110°C in the sampling line, respectively,
the calculated residence time is similar, approximately one second.  Although
these times are well within the required residence times required by the
Federal Register (1976), it should be pointed out that a gas sample typically
undergoes much longer transit times as it passes through the remainder of the
sampling train prior to analysis.  For example, after the heated sample
line, the sample travels through refrigerators, metal bellows pumps, filters,
sample bypass, flow valves, all connecting lines and finally the chemilumenescence
detector.  Altogether these components increase the sample transit time (from
probe tip to detector) by a factor of 15 to 20 from what is calculated in the
sample line alone.  The increase is due not only to an increase in total  line
length but also to a pressure rise (via the pumps) and the sample bypass, both
of which act to drastically reduce the gas velocity.   The overall effect  of the
sample bypass is favorable, since it provides a technique to continually  flush
the sample lines and to increase the flow rate and velocity through the first
part of the sampling train.  Ideally, the bypass should be located immediately
upstream of the analytical instruments.  These comments are particularly  per-
tinent to analysis of gas samples containing high concentrations of nitric oxide
due to the reaction
                              NO + NO + 0- -> 2N02                          (2)

which is second order in NO and third order in total pressure.   In the case of
the gas correlation measurements, NO concentrations of nearly 10,000 ppm were
required.  With an oxygen rich environment, measurements in this laboratory
demonstrated that as much as 7 percent of the NO was converted to N02 via
Reaction 2. Indeed, kinetic measurements performed in this sampling system pro-
duced an evaluation of the rate constant k2 which was within 25 percent of the
accepted value (Hampsonand Garvin, 1978).and were consistent with the fractional
conversion to N02 observed during the IR measurements.  Therefore, any N02
(NOX minus NO)  was assumed to be formed in the sampling line (and are reported
as NO) for these series of tests where nitric oxide concentrations were
exceptionally high.
                                       11-30

-------
     II. B. 3. d  Mass_S£ectr£LL Analy_sjLs

     The calibration was conducted with mixtures of NO in Ar for the lower
temperatures (T < 900 K) and by seeding NO into lean H2/02/Ar flame at the higher
temperatures (900 K < T < 2000 K) .  Standard instrumentation used for emission
measurements is not suitable for determining H2 and Ar.  In addition, since the
calibration of the chemiluminescent analyzer is dependent on the bulk or carrier
gas,, interpreting NO measurements in the region of the buffer and shroud is not
straightforward.

     Mass spectrometry is a method that with proper sampling technique can readily
measure homonuclear molecules  (H2, 02, N~), inert gases, and nitric oxide.  More-
over, proper sampling is more  easily achieved since the mass spectrometer inlet
and sampling line can be operated at pressures of 10 torr (1.3 kPa).  This ensures
a rapid reduction of the sampled gas temperature and pressure and minimizes sample
transfer time.  Since only small mass flows are required to make a measurement,
the probe orifice can be made  smaller than that used if a standard analytical
instrument train is employed.

     The instrument used in these measurements is a one-meter, time-of-flight mass
spectrometer operated at a source pressure of 5 x 10~" torr (6.6 x 10   Pa).
Residual gas pressure is typically less than 1 x 10~^ torr (1.33 x 10~^ Pa).  The
master clock for the instrument is crystal controlled at 10 kHz; hence, 10^ spectra
per second are obtained.  Through the use of ion sampling, the high frequency real-
time output is converted into  a lower frequency suitable for a data acquisition
system.  This acquisition system was a Northern Scientific NS 575 signal averager
and NS 408 F tape interface with a Wang Mod 7 digital tape transport.  For the
data reported here, 8 to 32 low frequency spectra were averaged to improve the
precision of the data.  The mass spectrometer inlet was maintained at 8 torr
(1.06 kPa).  The sample line was heated 3/8" stainless steel which was held at
a temperature no greater than  390 K.  The terminal pressure of the sample line
when capped was 1.5 x 10"^ torr (2.0 Pa).  Sample transfer time was less than 0.5
sec for He.

     The procedure used to reduce the data depended on the calibration device.
For the flowing gas heater, the procedure consisted of measuring the intensities
at masses 28 (N2) , 30 (NO), 36 (Ar), 40 (Ar).  36Ar isotope was used as a monitor
on instrument performance.  The sensitivity factors for these constituents were
empirically determined from gas standards and from mixes of gases prepared with
the critical flow gas system.  These sensitivity factors are used to take into
account viscous effects in the mass spectrometer gas inlet, ion source pumping
speed,  ionization cross section, ion gate transmission, and ion detector mass
                                        11-31

-------
                                                                     Ar
discrimination.  The sensitivity factors used relative to Ar, i.e., S
were SfH; =1.16 and SAr = 1.03.  Mole fraction of NO was obtained from
                                                                          1.0,
          ''NO
             = S**. I(30)/{SAr. 1(28)
                NO
.. 1(30) + 1(40)}
                                                                             (12)
     For the flat flame burner, the procedure is made complicated by the difficulty
in making an accurate H~0 measurement.  The standard method employed in emission
measurements is to dry the sample in a low temperature trap.  Such a drying pro-
cedure is not required for these mass spectral measurements since the total molar
flow rate of Ar is known.  A further complication is introduced by the mixing of
gas from the three zones of the apparatus.  This latter problem can be treated by
using the knowledge that the N2 originates only from the window purge and the CO
comes only from the buffer zone flame.
     The composition of the flow at any point can be described by


                             XM + *B + V = X
                                                                             (13)
where X  is the fraction from the main burner flow, X,, is the fraction from the
buffer flow, and X^  is the fraction from the window purge.   Using N2 and C02 as
tracers, the local intensity  ratios  of  N2 and C02  to  Ar  are
                    1(28) =  1
                    1(40)   sF
                                             ^Ar
                                                                             (14)
and
1(44)
1(40)
= 1
sAr
co?
V R
BCOo
/
XM MAr +
V "D
Xfi BAr
                                                                             (15)
where M   is the mole fraction of Ar in the main burner flow;  B.   is the mole
fraction in the buffer flow; 1(44) is the C02 intensity; S^  is  the C02 sensi-
tivity; and BCQ  is the mole fraction of C02 produced in the buffer flame.  M.
and B. are known from the calibrated flow system.   BCQ_ is known from the
                                                Solving for XM  and XT. yields
             CQ                            2
        are known from the calibrated flow system.
equilibrium value of C02 for the buffer flame.
         *N2
                   ,Ar
                   3 CO-
                        1(44)
                    N2
                       1(28)
                                  1 -
                                      M
                                       Ar
                                             "CO,
                                                   +  1
                                                     M
                                                      Ar
                K40) \ +
                1(28)
                                                                        -1
                                                                             (16)
                                       11-32

-------
                                                Bco2
 The results of equations (16) and (17) can be inserted into equation (13) which
 then can be solved for X,,.

      Given these expressions, the local water to argon expression can be
 calculated from
           K18)
                                 XM
 where  Bu     and >L.  n are known from the equilibrium value of  H90 for the buffer and
        n.-jUrl^u                                          z
 main flames,  respectively.   The mole fraction at any point for a given ith molecule
 is
where                                                                         .

     T =  1 +  TT40) )  S^  .1(44)  + S^.  1(28)  + S^.  1(30) + S^.  (32) +  1(18))  (20)
                    *22                          2,

All terms are measured values  with the  exception of  the  1(18)/I(40) ratio which  is
calculated.  Also, for the  buffer region and  a small  region  on  either side of
it, corrections are made for the  contributions of C0(30)  isotope to the nitric
oxide intensity and for the contributions of  C0(28)  from the flame and ion
fragmentation of C02  to the nitrogen  intensity.

     11. B. 3 . e.  Ex£er_:ijneii t a.l_R£su_l_t s_

     Initial tests of  several  flame conditions indicated  a flow instability
several centimeters above the  burner  surface.   To dampen  these  flow fluctuations
a three level tier of  screens  was constructed  and hung from  the side walls of the
shroud.   The lowest screen  was 7  cm above the  optical axis.   Slots were cut at
appropriate positions  for movement of the probes along the optical axis.  Although
not mentioned previously, this set of screens  was used in all measurements above
the flat flame burner and flowing gas heater.
                                        11-33

-------
                                     TABLE II-B

                      FLOW CONDITIONS FOR OPTICAL MEASUREMENTS
                               OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER
Uncorrected
Thermocouple
Mole Fraction
                                      Distance of    Total
                                      optical axis   Molar
Temperature
(K)
950
1220
14 00
1600
^- —
H2
0.073
0.116
0.169
0.330
•» 	 ^^__j>—
°2
0.102
0.114
0.116
0.170
	 -^
Ar
0.825
0.770
0.715
0.491
Equivalence
Ratio
0.36
0.51
0.73
0.92
above burner
(cm)
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.0
flow rate
(moles/sec)
0.128
0.134
0.145
0.194
                                       11-34

-------
     After selecting several flame conditions (listed in Table II-B),  initial
gas sampling was made with probe B (Table II-A)  and analysis was made  with the
mass spectrometer.  Typical profiles of nitric oxide along the optical axis are
shown  in Fig. 16.  Flow conditions for the l^/C^/Ar flames are given in
Table  II-B.  The observed scatter is characteristic of a statistical analysis
for the operating conditions of the mass spectrometer.  This scatter could be
reduced by additional averaging of spectra.  It is apparent that nitric oxide
is conserved through the flame front at least for the low temperature  flames.
Similar data demonstrates conservation at higher temperatures.

     A typical thermocouple profile with radiation corrections is reproduced in
Fig.  17.  The profile shows near symmetry around the centerline.   The  slight
temperature rise near the edges (around 8 cm from the center)  is  probably due to
a separation by the sintered copper and the copper plate between  the main and the
buffer flows.  Resultant gas velocities are higher which push the flame away from
the burner and decrease the local heat loss to the burner.

     At approximately 8.5 centimeters from the center of the burner, the tempera-
ture drops drastically.  This fall-off seems surprising considering the existence
of the buffer flame out to 10.2 centimeters and is caused by the strong nitrogen
purge exiting from the window tubes.   The effect of the purge at  the selected
flow rates is quite noticeable on both the temperature and NO profiles.   Although
this perturbation is undesirable, its presence does not affect the ability to
make the optical measurements since probe measurements provide sufficient data to
reduce results using multiple zones.   Probe measurements indicated that lower flow
rates were ineffective in flushing out cold NO from the optical arms.   Additional
experimental data on both the flowing gas heater and flat flame burner  are
presented in the following chapter.
                                       11-35

-------
                                                                          FIG. 16
      NO HORIZONTAL PROFILES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER
                               H2/O2/Ar
                      THERMOCOUPLE     NO SEED

                      TEMPERATURES   LEVELS (WET)
                            (K)
                                         ppm
                MASS

                SPEC
                CHEMI
1220


 950


 950


 950
1995 \


2030 > PROBE B


2030 )


2030  PROBE C
    1.2
    1.0
 Q
 01
 LU
 00
O
z
O
z
                           4          6          8     -1-   10

                        DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                                         12
                                                                        79-04-54-8
                                 11-36

-------
                             HORIZONTAL TEMPERATURE PROFILES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER
                                                           H2/O2/Ar

                                                UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 1400K
     1800
     1600
     1400
     1200
   i. 1000
      800
      600
      400
ID
I
O
200
Hi

                                                       j_
                                                                                  -8-
                                                                                UNCORRECTED

                                                                                TEMPERATURES
                                                     O  5/1/78

                                                     D  5/5/78

                                                     A  RADIATION CORRECTION
                                                                          I
        -12      -10       -8       -6       -4-20         2

                                                   DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                                                                                              10
                                                                                                                  12

-------
                            III.  ULTRAVIOLET ABSORPTION


                                   A.  Apparatus

III.A.I.  Gas Mixing System for Static Cell Optical Measurement

     The majority of static cell calibration data were obtained by mixing gases
using the system shown in Fig. 18.   The system was evacuated below 25 x 10   torr
(3.3 Pa.) and then filled with a calibration gas to the desired pressure.  If it
was desired to raise the pressure of the diluent gas further without adding more
NO, the valve to the static cell was closed, the system evacuated, and then filled
with the diluent gas by slowly raising the regulator pressure until the final
desired pressure was reached.  The valve to the static cell was opened so that
the pressure in the rest of the system dropped and then quickly recovered via the
regulator to the desired final pressure and the valve was closed.

     Pressures were monitored with three gauges.  A thermocouple gauge was used
to verify the vacuum integrity of the system.  A Barocell Datametrics capacitance
manometer (model 570 A sensor and model 1173 readout) with full scale ranges from
0 - 0.1 torr (0 - 13.3 Pa.) to 0 - 1000 torr (0 - 133.3 kPa.) was used along with
a Wallace and Tiernan 0 - 150 psia (0 - 1.034 MPa.) pressure gauge to determine
pressures.

     For the broadening and oscillator strength study, cylinders of NO diluted to
about 2000 ppm in N2, Ar, C^, and CH/ were obtained from Scott Environmental
Technology along with the highest purity diluent gases commercially available.
The specifications for these gases are given in Table III-A.  The NO/ No  con-
centration was independently verified; but, the other cylinders were accepted
as labeled based on gravimetric blending by the vendor and vendor analysis.

III.A.2.  Light Sources

     Two distinct types of light sources were used.  One lamp was a low pressure
hollow cathode lamp which produced discrete emission lines in the y (0,0), y (1,1),
and y (2,2) bands of NO.  The other lamp was a high pressure Xe lamp which pro-
duced continuum radiation in the region of interest.

     III.A.2.a.  Na£Tow-Line Lamp

     The hollow cathode lamp was operated with a dc discharge in flowing air and
produced emission lines from principally NO molecules, N2 molecules and ions, and
Ar atoms.  The spectral lines used in this study were in the y (0,0),  y (1,1), and
y (2,2)  bands (A2I+ - X2ir) of NO.
                                        III-I

-------
                           ARRANGEMENT OF APPARATUS FOR OPTICAL MEASUREMENTS

                                                     0-1.32 ATM
                                                        —>
                                                         P
HOLLOW CATHODE LAMP
         OR
 HIGH PRESS. Xe LAMP
                                                                                      10%NO/Ar
                                                                                     2000PPM NO/X
    LIGHT SOURCE    QUARTZ LENS
          ABSORPTION CELL
MIRROR    (OR TEST SECTION)
                                   FILTER 226nm
                                   PHOTOMULTIPLIER
                                                                                                  J-Y 1.5M
                                                                                               SPECTROMETER
                                                                            COOLED PHOTOMULTIPLIER
                                                                  RATIOMETER
                                                                                            CHART RECORDER
                                                                                                                               P

                                                                                                                               03

-------
                              TABLE III-A
                        Specifications for Gases
Gas Blends of NO



Diluent Gas



    Ar


    C02


    CH4


    No
Concentration
    of NO
    (pptn)


    1980


    2030


    2000


    2080
Vendor Analysis
   Accuracy
     ±1%


     ±1%


     ±1%


     ±2%
Pure Gases


Diluent Gas


    N2


    co2


    CO


    CH4


    Ar
Purity
99.998%
99.99%
99.99%
99 . 99%
99.999%
Maximum (
5 ppm
5 ppm
5 ppm
5 ppm
2 ppm
                                  III-3

-------
     The design of the water-cooled hollow cathode lamp is shown in Fig. 19 and
followed that of Meinel (1975), who generously provided a drawing. of his lamp.
The operating characteristics are similar to those described by Meinel  (1975) .
The lamp was operated on flowing air at a pressure of 2 torr and a current of
25 mA (0.1% electronic stability over eight hours).  The ballast resistors were
combined for a net resistance of 1.67K and the operating voltage was about 600V.
At constant pressure, the intensity stability of the lamp was excellent (<.5%
drift) over several hours.

     The possible steps leading to the production of NO in an excited state from
air in the discharge are discussed by Meinel (1975) .  It is clear from  the emission
spectra that the excited NO molecules are not in rotational or vibrational thermal
equilibrium.  The population distribution of the 2j;(v'=0) level is shown in Fig.
20, where the points represent resolved spectral lines.  The lines drawn through
the points were used as an input to the computer program to determine the
strengths of unresolved lines, as explained in the description of the computer
program.

     There is a small amount of light in the NO y (0.0) band which appears to be
from some molecule(s) other than NO.  The NO lines may be readily located, but there
are some weaker spectral features between the lines which have not been identified,
as shown in Fig. 21.  These extra lines are not absorbed like the other NO lines
as shown in Fig. 22.  The effect that this "extra-light" has on the measured  f-
values is discussed in the section describing the oscillator strength measurements.

     1 1 1 . A . 2 . b  Ck> ri t jLnuum Lamp

     The lamp used to obtain a continuum output was a 1000 watt- high pressure Xe
arc lamp (Canrad-Hanovia 976C-0010) mounted in an Oriel housing and using an  Oriel
power supply.  The lamp exhibited a moderate amount of intensity drift  (3% over
10 min) , and the lamp housing had to be vented to the outside because of the
significant quantity of ozone produced.
     1 1 1 . A . 2 . c  S£e£t£ome_t er_ a_n<^ Assp£ia_t £d_E ^e£t ran ic s

     A 1.5-m focal length J-Y spectrometer in a temperature controlled box with a
2400 g/mm holographic grating (110 x 110 mm), aperture of f/12, and Fastie curved
slits was employed for all measurements.  Typical slit function, full width  at
half maximum (FWHM), was observed to be  .0018 run with 7 um slit settings  for  the
226 nm NO lines observed in the 2nd order of the grating.  Most of the spectra
were recorded with a Hamamatsu R166 solar blind (Cs-Te photocathode) photo-
multiplier tube cooled to -30°C in a Products for Research TE-177 thermoelectrically
cooled housing.  Some measurements were also made with an EMI 9659QB photo-
multiplier (extended S-20 photocathode) cooled to -78°C with dry ice.
                                       III-4

-------
WATER COOLED HOLLOW CATHODE LAMP
                                                                     T\

                                                                     P
                                                                     —.
                                                                     CO

-------
                                                                                      FIG. 20
7.0

6.0

5.0

4.0


3.0



2.0
                 INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION IN NARROW-LINE LAMP
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6

0.5

0.4


0.3



0.2
              1*1 (I/S) = -0.002563 Eu + 117.23
              •CORRELATION = -0.841
              T = 561 K
              AH (I/S) = -0.00084107 Eu + 38.939
              . CORRELATION = -0.986
               T= 1711 K
      I  I   I
                I  I   1  I   I  I
                                         I	I
                                I
           I
45.000
       I  I  i  i  i
   46,000                    47,000
              TOTAL ENERGY, Eu, CM~1
i  i  I  i  I   i  i   i  i  I  i   i  i   I  I
        48,000
              I
                                                                                     I
           I
                  500
        1000         1500         2000
             ROTATIONAL ENERGY, CM"1
2500
3000

  79-04-93-9
                                         J.II-6

-------
                                                                                                       FIG.  21
                                   NARROW-LINE LAMP EMISSION

                                  1- Pn  (6.5) + PI, (11.5)
                                  2. Pn  (7.5) + P^dO.5) + P22 (22.5) + Q12 (22.5)
                                  3. PH  (8.5)  +• Pn (9.5)
                                  4. Q22 (14.5) + R-|2 H4.5) + R22 (9.5) + P12 (31.5)
                                  5. P22 (21.5) + Q12 (21.5)
CO
•z.
LU
        ZERO
                        I
                     226.36
   I                     I
226.38                226.40
     WAVELENGTH, nm
                                                                                                   ZERO
                                                                                                   79-02-155-1
                                                    III-7

-------
       EMISSION FROM FIG. 21 AFTER ABSORPTION BY 5 TORR 10% NO/AR
                           OVER  PATH LENGTH  OF 18.6 cm
                                                                                     FIG. 22
1. Pn (6.5) + P^ (11.5)

2. P1 1 (7.5) + P.| ., (1 0.5) + P22 (22.5) + (X, 2 (22.5)

3. Pn (8.5) -f Pn (9.5)

4. Q22 (14.5) + R12 (14.5) + R22 (9.5)

               (21.5)
                            5. P22 (21.5)
oo
                                      WAVELENGTH
                                                                                 79-02-1 S5-2

-------
   The signal from the photomultiplier was amplified with an Analog Devices
AD310K used in the electrometer mode with feedback components of Rf = 100 M
and G£ = SOOOpf.  The scan rate was 3.95 • 10~4 nm/sec.  The resulting spectra
were recorded with a Hewlett-Packard 7100B strip chart recorder.  In the case
of the continuum lamp, some of the spectra were corrected for lamp drift by a
ratiometric technique.  This involved a reference measurement of the source lamp
prior to any absorption, and was accomplished by placing a flat mirror slightly
off the beam directed through the calibration apparatus which reflected light
through a 226 run filter and onto an EMI 9601B photomultiplier tube.  The signal
from the spectrometer was divided by this reference signal in an Ithaco model
3512 ratiometer and this resultant ratio was recorded on the strip chart recorder.
This ratiometric technique reduced but did not eliminate baseline drift in the
recorded spectra while using the continuum lamp.

     The ultraviolet  radiation  from  the  source  lamp  was  collimated  and  directed
through the 12.7 mm diameter  apertures  in  the FGH/FFB  shroud,  across  the  FGH/FFB,
and then imaged on the  spectrometer  slit using  fused  silica  lenses.

     The spectrometer was  operated in high  resolution  and  low  resolution.  The
slits were set  at about  5  to  10  ym for  the  high resolution work,  corresponding
to slit functions with  FWHM of  about  .0015  nm to  .0025 nm.   The slits were set
at 1380 pm for  the low  resolution studies,  with a  FWHM value of 0.146 nm.

III.A.3  Static Cell

     The static cell  is  a  room  temperature  absorption  cell made of  stainless  steel
with valves toward each end and  UV grade  fused  silica  windows.   The cell  was
leaked checked  at 10~6  torr  (1.33'10~4  Pa.)  and 115  psig (791  kPa.).  The cell
i.d. is 22 mm and the optical path is 18.6  cm.
                                       III-9

-------
               B.   Theoretical Development of  Ultraviolet  Absorption

III.B.I.   Necessity fc>r Theoretical Model

    A detailed theoretical model has been developed to  describe the absorption
of ultraviolet radiation by nitric oxide in the  (0,0)  band.   It would  not  be
unreasonable to question the necessity for such a first principles  model, when
the possibility exists for an empirical calibration technique.   But how well  can
known concentrations of NO be generated over a temperature range of 300 K to
2000 K and a pressure range of 0.5 to 1.5 atm?  The answer is  that  it  is diffi-
cult and expensive to generate a complete range of conditions  necessary for
repetitive empirical calibration.   The approach adopted in this work was to start
with a theoretical model and then verify that  model by  testing it over  a range of
conditions, similar to the approach used by Davis et al.  (1976a) but with addi-
tional information from high resolution continuum absorption data.

     An additional problem with empirical models  is  that  they  are  often instru-
ment dependent and quite  difficult  to  transfer from  a  given instrument at  one
laboratory  to  instruments in  general.  An example  for  this particular  experiment
would be  that  a strictly  empirical  calibration would depend on  the  characteristics
of  the narrow-line source  (rotational  distribution)  and the spectrometer (PM  tube
response  and slit  function) which would make  duplication  of results at various
laboratories difficult.   The  theoretical model does  include  some empirical
"adjustments," as will be discussed, and several  experimentally determined input
parameters, but the  absorption process is modeled  from basic principles.

III.B.2.  Transmission  Formulas, Narrow-Line Source

     The  general problem  of relating measured  absorptions in  the y(0,0) band  to
molecular densities  of NO may be  summarized as follows.   In order  to predict  low
resolution  absorption  profiles in the  y(0,0)  band,  it  is  necessary  to  model  on
the order of 500 lines whose  relative  intensities  change  with  temperature, and
whose shape changes  with  temperature,  pressure,  and  gas composition.   These
lines are so closely spaced that  even when recorded  with  a high resolution
instrument, many of  the lines overlap.

     The  theory for  the transmission of a group  of  Doppler broadened NO source
lines through an absorbing gas with both Doppler  and collision broadened lines
has been developed by  Davis et al.  (1976).  We will use the results of Eqs.  (1)
through (14) of Davis  et  al.  (1976), which  can be summarized  as follows.   The
total transmitted intensity for the j th emission line  (T^) due to  absorption  by
many lines  is related to the line center source  intensity of the jth line  (1° ?) ,
the Doppler'width of the  source  (Agv.)   the  line  center  Doppler absorption
coefficient of tne gas  (kv-),  the broadening  parameter (a1),  and the path  length
 U) by,
                                       111-10

-------
°  f
                        exp
                                       J'D
                                                                             (20)
      exp
                                     dy
                                +  (0).  -
                            dv
where a'  is related  to  the Lorentz  full width  at half maximum  (FWHM)  in  the
absorbing gas  (A  v^)  and  the  corresponding  FWHM of  the  Doppler component
(AaVDby

                              L
                                                                             (21)
 and where
                                                                             (22)
The DopDler widths  (FWHM)  of  the  source  and absorbing line are given by
     .A
     (A
= v.
                        2(ln  2)k T _
                       --
                            m
                            2 (In 2)  RT
                               M
                                                               (23)
where v^ is  the wavenumber of line center, c is the speed of light, k is
Boltzmann's  constant, T  is the appropriate temperature  (either source or
absorber), m is the molecular mass in grams of the emitting or absorbing
molecule, R  is the universal gas  constant, and M is the molecular weight in
grams per mole.  The Lorentz FWHM due to  collisions is given by,
                          L •
                          IT  T  C
                                                          (24)
where Z  is the frequency of collisions between an absorbing molecule and the
perturbing molecules, and T is 1/Z  or the mean time between collisions.
                                  LJ

     It should be noted that this development assumes that the collision process
and line broadening can be accurately explained by the Lorentz collision theory,
an assumption which is discussed in detail later in this report.  The use of the
Lorentz theory to examine experimental results is certainly the usual assumption,
but deviations from Lorentz-theory behavior have been observed in numerous
instances (see Section III.B.5 on broadening theory).
                                       III-ll

-------
     It is worthwhile considering the factors in Eq. (20) which must be known
or determined in order to predict the transmission.  The relative .intensities
of the source lines at line center must be measured for the narrow-line lamp,
and intensities of lines that cannot be measured directly must be interpolated
from a Boltzmann plot such as shown in Fig. 20.  The Doppler FWHM ((Avj)D) may
easily be calculated from Eq.  (23).  The path  length  (£) is easily  determined.
The broadening parameter (a1) must be determined experimentally because
theoretical computation of the Lorentz FWHM (^Aavi^L^ wnich is necessary to
determine a' through Eq. (21) is not feasible.  The experimental technique
used to determine a' is described in a later section.   The final parameter
which must be determined to solve Eq. (20)  for the transmission is  the absorption
coefficient at line center for a Doppler broadened line (k) .  The relation
between ^v^ and the density of molecules in the initial state and the oscillator
strength is described below.
II.B.3  Computation of Doppler Absorption Coefficient

     The line center absorption coefficient for a Doppler broadened line
(kv°) is given by Mitchell and Zemansky (1971),
              2
     k o  = 2 e   yA ln 2        M(n"y" I "J" p")  f y*y" j'j"               (25)

      Vl     ^ C                   (Vl>D

where e is the electron charge, me is the electron mass, c is the speed of
light,  f ,  IIT,,,, is the oscillator strength of the line, and N(n"v"£"J"p")
is the population of the initial energy state.  The single and double primes
refer to upper and lower electronic state parameters, respectively.

     The Doppler FWHM (C^v.^)-) can be calculated from Eq. (23).  The
oscillator strength for a line  (f 'v"j'J"K'K"P"^ "*"s relatec' to the oscillator
strength for a band (fvivi.) by  (Thorne (1974)5,
                   f                    S
                    v'v"J'J"K'K"p"   _   J'J"K'K"p"   ^  f )(                 (26)
                                         2J" + 1
where Sj i J"K'K"P" ^-s ^e Honl-London factor and J" is the rotational quantum number
in the lower electronic state.  The band oscillator strength  (fin) for  the
NO y(0,0)  band has been measured previously and another determination is
reported in this work (see experimental results section).  The Honl-London
factors may be computed from equations given by Earls (1935), but with an
adjustment factor for proper normalization (multiply Earls values by A).  It
is important to note that the summation convention for the Honl-London factors
suggested  by Tatum (1967) has been adopted here,  that is:
                                       111-12

-------
         Z         L s
       •L-.    .,       .  JJ   — \^-—Or>ft!!)(jLD~!~_L)lZJ  ~r J_ )                   (27)
     sub-levels     J              ^''^                                        ^

where  the  summation over sub-levels includes both spin splitting levels
(the 2S +  1  factor)  and  A doubling levels (the 2-<$0 A factor) .   The value
6o'Ais unity  for  A  = 0,  but  zero otherwise.   For the NO y(0,0)  band, the
summation  convention for the Honl-London factor becomes

                        Z       Z   S     = 4 (2J" + 1)                    (28)
                     sub-levels   J'

from the fact that  (2S + 1)  = 2, and (2-6^,,) = 2 (see later section on the
spectroscopy  of NO  for an explanation  ol quantum numbers;.

     The remaining  factor in Eq. (25)  which must be determined  in order to
solve  for  ^v^ is  represented by  the somewhat awkward but definitive notation
N(n"v" Z"J"p"), which  is the population of the energy level of  interest for a
molecule obeying  Hund's  case (a).   The more often used symbol N,.,, is sometimes
ambiguous  in  that it may or  may  not include the factor of 1/2 for the A doubled
levels.  Thus N(n"v"Z"J"p")  represents the number of molecules  in the electronic
state  n",  vibrational  state  v",  spin state Z", rotational level J",  and with
specified  parity  p"  (+ or -).  The fraction of the total number of molecules
which  are  in  a given level is  represented by N(n"v"Z"J"p")/N, and can be
determined for the  NO  2ir-^/2  and  2:13/2  sublevels of the ground state  as  follows.

     The ground state of the NO  molecule is  intermediate between Hund's cases
(a) and (b), but  to  a close  approximation follows Hund's case (a).   Following
Tatum's (1967) convention and  notation for Hund's case (a)  for  the 2ir-,/2 state
(all terms are for  the lower  electronic state and, hence, should have double
primes),


w,  -T *      f 2(2S  + 1)  exp  ((-hc/kT)  To)      ]  fexp ((-hc/kT)  G(v))
IN y. nvL j p)  _   |	i x|	
               I          2(2S+1)  exp ((-hc/kT) T0)J  [Zv exp ((-hc/kT)  G(v))
               all states
                                                                            (29)
              I exp  ((-hc/kT)  (-A/2))	1
              [exp  ((-hc/kT)  (-A/2)) + exp  ((-hc/kT)  (A/2))J

               (2J + 1)  exp  ((-hc/kT)  F(J))
          x
                E  (2J + 1) exp  ((-hc/kT)  F(J))
                                       111-13

-------
where S is the electron spin quantum number, h is Planck's constant, TQ is the
electronic term value when spin is neglected, G(v) is the vibratianal term
value, A is the spin splitting constant, and F(J) is the rotational term value.
The equivalent expression for the 2ir  .  state is identical except that the
numerator in the third term in brackets becomes exp ((-hc/kT)(A/2)).

     The first term in brackets in Eq.  (29) is the fractional population of a
given electronic level, N(n)/N, and differs from that given by Tatum in that
we have used the "average" electronic term value T  (or electronic term value
when spin is ignored) rather than Tatum's Te where Te = Tn + AAZ (for  ^1/2'
Te = TQ-(A/2); for 2*3/2> Te = To + (A/2)).  The use of Te in place of TQ
would produce (for the N0y(0,0) band),  a term essentially* identical to the
third term in brackets in Eq. (29), but following Tatum's guidelines, the
fractional populations of the spin-split levels are to be calculated separately
and explicitly as N(nvZ)/N(nv), the third term in brackets.  Thus, it would
appear that Tatum has accounted for the fractional populations of the spin-
split levels twice, which we have avoided by using T  in Eq. (29).  For the
electronic term value, as expressed in  Eq.  (29), the first term in brackets
is unity.

     The second term in brackets in Eq. (29) is the fractional population of a
given vibrational level, N(nv)/N(n), which for the v" = 0 level is close to
unity at 300 K but decreases to about 0.74 at 2000 K.  The third term in
brackets in Eq.  (29) determines the fractional population N(nvE)/N(nv) of the
spin-split  T]/2 an^  ^3/2 J-ev£ls.  The fourth term in brackets represents the
fractional population of a given rotational level N(nvZJ)/N(nvZ).  By
employing the usual approximations (Herzberg (I95o))> the sum in the denom-
inator of the fourth term in brackets may be written as kT/hcB. • The fifth term,
symbolically written N(nvZJp)/N(nvZJ) ,  accounts for the A-type doubling of
the rotational levels of the ^ state into two sublevels of parity + and -.
Because the upper electronic state being considered is a 2£ state, only one of
the two sublevels is active for a transition to a specified upper state
rotational level (Herzberg (1950)).
* This assumes that exp ((-hc/kT)Te) « 1 for all electronic states higher
  than the ground state (IT), which is true for the NO molecule even at high
  temperature.
                                       III-1A

-------
                             rj
     Thus, Eq.  (29)  for  the      o  state may be rewritten:
N(nvEJp) ^  exp((-hc/kT)G(v))
   N        Ev exp((-hc/kT)G(v))
                                             exp ((-hc/kT)  (-,
         x|h_cB_  (2J + 1) exp  ((-hc/kT)  F  (J))
            £ K i.
                                             exp((-hc/kT)(-A/2))  + exp((-hc/kT)(A/2))|

                                                                             (30)
The equivalent expression  for  the   ^3/0  state is:
N(nvEJp)
   N
             exp((-hc/kT)G(v))
             Ev  exp((-hc/kT)G(v))
exp((-hc/kT) (A/2))
exp((-hc/kT) (-A/2)) + exp((-hc/kT)(A/2))
            hcB   (2J +  1)  exp  ((-hc/kT)  F (J)) |
            2kT
                                                                             (31)
      These expressions may be modified intermediate to Hund's case (a) and (b) by
 absorbing the spin-splitting term into the expression for F(J) (Hill and Van
 Vleck (1928)) and dropping the third term in brackets on the right-hand side of
 Eq.  (29).   When this is done, however, the rotational partition function may no
 longer (in general)  be approximated as kT/hcB.  Assuming that the spin-splitting
 energy is  absorbed into F(J) and the resultant is labeled Fi(J), with i = 1 for
 the 2Tr     state and  i = 2 for the 2__ ,„ state, then instead of Eqs. (30) and (31),
      1/2
 one gets,


N(nv(EJ)p)  =  [exp((-hc/kT)
    N
                                   2     state, then instead of Eqs.
                   exp((-hc/kT)  G(v))
            x   (2J + 1) exp  ((-hc/kT)  Fn.  (J)
                                                                             (32)
                V=l,
                              E  (2J+1)  exp  ((-hc/kT) F± (J))
For the NO molecule, we have  determined that the rotational partition function
can be approximated with high accuracy (± 0.3% for 300 K < T <  2000 K) as
almost Hund's case  (a),
                                        111-15

-------
   Ei .  1   2^   (2J+l)exp((-hc/kT)Fi  (J)) =(kT/hcB) fexp((-hc/kT)(-A+2B)/2)
             J                                     I                     i     (33)
                                                  + exp(-hc/kT)(A-2B)/2)

 for the energy  equations  and  constants as  given by Engleman, et  al  (1970).   This
 approximation was  subsequently verified  by D. Keefer.  Thus, Eq.  (32)  for  the
 intermediate Hund's  case  between  (a)  and (b) becomes,

N(nv(ZJ)p)  ^  [ exp((-hc/kT)G(v))
    N          J Zv exp((-hc/kT)G(v))

                                                                              (34)
                exp( (-hc/kT) (-A+2B)/2) -I- exp( (-hc/kT) (A-2B)/2

                hcB   (2J+1)  exp  ((-hc/kT) F± (J)
                2kT

     If Eqs. 23, 26, and 34 are substituted into Eq.  (25), the result is
                                 V V   J'J"

                                                                              (35)

    x /exp((-hc/kTa) G(v"))  \      x   /	1	
        :v,, exp((-hc/kTa)G(v"))/          \exp((-hc/kTa)(-A+2B)/2)+exp((-hc/kTa)(A-2B)/2)j

    x   exp((-hc/kTa) F.(J"))

or, substituting for the constants,

k - = 1.755-10"10 f , „ s     N  /exp(-1.4388G(v")/Ta)    ,
 Vi      T3/2      vv   J'J"    lzv,, exp(-1.4388G(v")/Ta)J

          3                                                                   (36)
                                    (exp(-1.4388F F,(J")/T))
                                                   J-.      d
     exp(86.18/Ta)+exp(-86.18/Ta)

     With Eq. (36) for kv?, all terms necessary to calculate the  transmission
(Tj) using Eq.  (20) have been  determined  except  for  the broadening parameter a'
and a confirmation of the band oscillator strength f  '  ".

III.B.4,  Transmission Formulas, Continuum Source

     The development of the transmission formulas for continuum radiation  is very
similar to that used for the narrow-line case given in  Eq.  (20).  The  source func-
tion is much simplified to just I(v), which is a very slowly varying and easily
measured function.  The transmitted intensities must be recorded  continuously  as
                                       111-16

-------
a function of wavenumber rather than as discrete intensities at the line center
of emission lines, as is done for the narrow-line source.  The transmission at any
wavenumber v is,

   T(v) = I(v)exp|-_l 2  k°A'e-y2dy   I                                 (37)
                 |-_l S k ° A'g y ^
                 I  TT   i  vij a'2+(wi-
where the symbols are the same as explained previously for Eq.  (20).

III.B.5 Broadening Theory

     There  is  no  lack of  theoretical models  available to treat  pressure  broaden-
ing.  The theories of pressure broadening  are  discussed  in some detail by
Breene  (1957), Hindmarsh and Farr  (1972),  and  Mitchell and Zemansky  (1971).
Thorne  (1974)  discusses the  subject  with less  depth but  good clarity.  An
often quoted work for microwave  and  infra-red  regions  is  the paper by
Anderson  (1949).

     In spite  of  the  number  of theoretical models available, experimentalists
tend  to use the  standard Lorentz  theory and label discrepancies as  deviations
from the Lorentz  theory, rather  than attempting  to use other models.  In this
report, results from  the Lorentz theory and Weisskopf  theory are used, but
the reader  is  referred to the previous references for  the details of these
theories.

     The Lorentz model assumes that  the optical  collision diameter is indepen-
dent of the relative velocities  of the two colliding molecules  (or atoms).
From the Lorentz  theory the  FWHM due to collisions, AvL,  is given by Mitchell
and Zemansky (1971),

                                           ZT
                                      AvL = -i                             (38)
                                           TTC

where Z^ is the collision frequency  of a single  molecule, c is  the velocity
of light,  and  Av^ is in wavenumbers.  It should  be noted that this is true
only for collisions between molecules of different types.  If the molecules
are all of the same type then Fq.  (38) is multiplied by a factor of  2.   This
is due to the  fact that each collision terminates one mean free path if the
collision is between the gas being studied and a foreign gas, but it termi-
nates two mean free paths if the collision is between two molecules of the
same type.  The interest here is in  collisions between a minor  species and
foreign gases,  so Eq. (38) applies.

     The total number of collisions  per second between molecules of type 1
and type 2 with number densities n,  and n2 and molecular weights (molar) M-i
and M2 is  given by Mitchell and  Zemansky (1971)  as,
                                     2    I      11
                          Y =  2n1n2d1_2 ^2uRT (— + -±)                  (39)
                                                Ml   M2
                                      111-17

-------
where d is the hard sphere collision diameter (d = r1+r2, where r is the radius), R
is the universal gas constant, and T the absolute temperature.  The collision fre-
quency per molecule of a given type is,
                         ZL = — =  2nX  o V 2"*T  (— + —)                (*<>)
                              n-i     ^  1—2  '       Mi   M2
 Combining Eqs.  (38),  (40),  (21)
                                                     Ml                    (41)
where  v  is  the wavenumber.   Expressing  n2  in  terms  of  the  partial  pressure  (atm)
of  the foreign gas  and  temperature  (K) , d in cm,  and v in cir^l

                          a,  =  4.14-1021    2       + %  £2                 (42)
                           2                1-2 >     M   T
                                                                           (43)
 If more  than  one  foreign  gas  is active  in broadening, Z   is  summed over  all
                                                       Lt
 the  species and a!  for  each species  is,


                                     a!  = C. I±                             (45)
                                      1    1 T

 where P.  is the partial pressure of  the ith species.  The total' a' is  the
 sum  of the a's.
            i

     An  important point must  be made regarding  the  collision diameter  and  the
 effective collision cross-section.   The effective optical collision  diameter
 is given by d in  the equations above.   References in  the  field  of kinetic
 theory,  such  as Reif (1965),  and Hirschf elder et al (1954),  call ird  the
 effective cross-section,  while Mitchell and Zemansky, Davis  et  al  (1976),  and
                                9
 others drop the IT and refer to d  as the effective  cross-section.  Thus,
 caution must  be exercised in  comparing  effective cross-sections given  by
 different authors.   We  define cross-section as  frd   in this report.

     According to the Lorentz theory, at constant pressure,  AVT is proportional
 to x~0-5 and  a' is  proportional to T.    .  There is  a significant amount  of
 evidence  to indicate that the temperature dependence  is stronger than  this.
 Hence, the temperature  dependence of Av should be  between T    and T     and
 that of a' between  T~ >u  and  T    .   Among the  evidence for  a stronger temp-
 erature dependence  for  neutral atoms or molecules is  work by Hansen  (1978).
 Townes and Schawlow (1955), Engleman (1969), Cann et  al (1979), Planet et  al  (1978),
 and  Breene (1967) .

                                        111-18

-------
      The Weisskopf theory gives a stronger temperature dependence in agree-
 ment  with a significant amount of experimental work (Thome (1974)).
 Weisskopf developed a collision theory which includes the effect of collision
 time  in computation of the cross-section.   For collisions between neutral
 atoms or molecules, the Weisskopf theory,  for a constant pressure,  gives the
 collision width as Avw proportional to T~  '7 and a' proportional to T."1*2
 This  is in almost exact agreement with the result reported by Hansen (1978)
 of  Av proportional to T~°4'^ for CO broadening over a wide range of temperatures.
 The evidence from the flame measurements reported here indicates that the
 temperature dependence of the Weisskopf theory seems to fit the experimental
 data  for NO broadening better than the Lorentz theory.

III.B.6.  Spectroscopic  Details  of  the  Nitric  Oxide  Ultraviolet Y  (0,0) Band

    III. B . 6 . a .  Band_Sv_st_ems_of_ N0_

      The  electronic transitions of  the NO  molecule  are  observed  in  the ultraviolet
 and vacuum  ultraviolet  spectral regions.   The lower energy  transitions involving
 the ground  (X TT^  state  are labeled as  follows (Pearse and  Gaydon (1965)).

                           Transition Type               Label

                           A E+ - X TT                    Y system

                            2      9
                           B TT  - X TT                     3 system

                            2      ?
                           C TT  - X~TT                     6 system

                           D2I+ - X2Tr                    E bands

 The excited  electronic  states  are labeled  in  order  of  increasing  energy by A, B,
 C,  etc.,  and therefore  the lowest energy (longest wavelength) transitions are in
 the Y  system, which makes  that  system  the  most  easily  accessible  for  absorption
 measurement  of  NO.

      The  bandheads  for  some of  the lower vibrational  levels are  shown in Table
 III-B.   For  determining NO concentrations  from  spectroscopic absorption measure-
 ments  at  temperatures below 1000 K,  it is  only  necessary to consider  those states
 originating  from  a  ground  vibrational  level  (v"  = 0).   The  longest  wavelength
 transition  of this  type is the Y (v'=0, v"=0) band  at  -226  nm.   A number of  exper-
 imental  problems  become more  severe  at wavelengths  shorter  than  this:  (1) the
 transmission of quartz  decreases,  (2)  hot  C02 and 02  bands  absorb more strongly
 at  flame  temperatures  (3)  the  chance of interfering absorptions  by  other species
 increases,  (4)  intense  continuum sources such as high  pressure Xe and Hg-Xe
 lamps  decrease  rapidly  in  intensity, and (5)  scattering by  soot  particles  gen-
 erally  increases.   Thus,  the  Y  (0,0) band  is  the most  reasonable band selection
 for the measurement of  NO  over  the temperature  range  from  300 K  to  2000 K.
                                      111-19

-------
               TABLE III-B

Bandheads in the Y -System of Nitric Oxide    v
        (Pearse and Gaydon (1965))

 Double bandheads are given for each band
                               I  „!!
      (nm)                    v'.v

     247.87                    0,2
     247.11

     244.70                    1,3
     244.00

     237.02                    0,1
     236.33

     231.63                    2,3
     230.95

     228.98                    3,4
     228.41

     226.94                    0,0
     226.28

     224.54                    1,1
     223.94

     222.24                    2,2
     221.63

     219.96                    3,3
     219.40

     215.49                    1,0
     214.91
                  111-20

-------
      The y (0,0)  band represents transitions between the zeroth vibrational  levels
 of  the excited state A^T.+ and the ground state X TT .  The ground electronic energy
 level of the NO molecule is split into two sub-levels, the lower energy ^TT^  state
 and the higher energy 2^^/2 state> which are widely split in energy  (-120 cm"1).
 Because of the considerable difference in energy of the two sublevels, the   TT
 state of NO is usually treated as following Hund's case (a), but is  actually
 intermediate to cases (a) and (b), approximating case (a) for small  rotational
 velocities, but undergoing some spin uncoupling at higher rotational rates.  The
 upper A2T+ electronic state belongs strictly to case (b) coupling, as do all I,
 states.
     111. B. 6 . b. E_ner_g_y  Levels

     The equations  and constants used here to determine the energy for various
rotational levels  in both upper and lower electronic states are almost exclusively
from Engleman,  et  al.  (1970).   Energy levels of a molecule (exclusive of trans-
lation) may  be  approximated  as the sum of the rotational (Er),  vibrational (Fv),
and electronic  energies (Ee),

                                 E = Ee + Ev + Er                          (46)
 It is  common practice to express the molecular energies as term values, which
 are energy values divided by he, and have units of cm   .  Using the term value
 notation,  Eq.  (46) becomes,

                                  T = Te + G(v) + F(J)                     (47)

In  an electronic  transition  the wave number (cm"1)  of a spectral line is given by
the difference  of  the  term value in the upper electronic state  (T!)  and the  lower
electronic state  (T") ,

         u = T' -  T" = (Tef  -  Te")  + (G'(v')  - G" (v11)) + (Fv. (J') -Fv" (J")) (48)

     III. B . 6 . c  E_n^r^y_L£V£l_E^u£t_ion_s_f£r_th.e_X^_Tr_S_tat_e__oJ_ N0_

     For the ^rr state  of  NO, the electronic energy and rotational  energy are
slightly coupled  so  that  Te  and F(J)  are not independent.  The  term value energy
equation is modified so that Fi(J)  contains not only the rotational  energy,  but
also the energy associated with the spin splitting in the ^TT  state,  and T  con-
tains the electronic energy  exclusive of spin-splitting,

                           •T"  = T " + G"(v")  + F."(J")                    (49)
                                  o               i

where the vibrational  term value G(v)  is,
                                       111-21

-------
                          G(v)  = u   (v+0.5)  - u X_  (v+0.5)2                 (50)
 and  the  rotational  term  F.(J)  is,


  F±(J)  = BV((J+0.5)2-l)-Dv((J+0.5)A-(J+0.5)2+l)+Bv Ja                     (51)

     a =  (Yv-2)2+  ((j+0.5)2-!)  l+2y(2(J+0.5)2-X)+y2f(2(J+0.5)2-l)2-l)j     (52)

                               Yv = [A + C(J-0.5)2J /Bv                    (53)

                                  y = DV/BV                                (54)

 The  minus (-) sign  is for the  2u^ state in which J = K + 0.5 and 1=1, while the
 plus (+) sign is  for the ^3/2 state in which J = K - 0.5 and 1=2.  It  should  be
 noted that our equation  for F.(J) includes a term "-Bv" not found in Engleman,
 et al. (1970), but  which should be included following the derivations from  the
 original papers cited by Engleman.  We have adjusted the upper state electronic
 energy given by Engleman, et al. accordingly.  We have likewise added to  the
 equation for a a  term "y2," but this is numerically inconsequential.  There also
 appears  to be a typographical error in the sign convention given by Engleman,
 et al.
                                                    r\
     In addition  to the  spin-orbit splitting of the  ir state, each of the levels
 is subject to a slight perturbation by A-type doubling due to the interaction
 between the rotation of  the nuclei and the electronic orbital angular momentum
 L (Herzberg (1950)).  The magnitude of this shift is given by , where,

          = 0.5  (J+O.
.5)  /2-Y^ + lWl+ Q }+ Q ((J+0.5)2-l)                (55)
    vr/—   '\z     '  TV
   L 2VoT              v^           J
and the sign convention is the same as above.  Because of A-type doubling, each
rotational level is split into two components, but for a given transition only
one of the components is active.  The reason for this is that the two components
are of opposite parity (+ and -).  Because of the selection rule 4- —> -, only one
of the components may interact with an upper state with specified parity  (the
upper state is not A-type doubled).  The A-type doubling has an influence on the
spectral line locations as follows,

                                   F.  = F. - 
                                    1C    X                                (56)
                                   Fid = Fi + *
                               2
where F.  is the energy of the  TT state (exclusive of vibrational energy) for the
transitions ?•,-,> P22' ^12' ^21' ^11' anc* R22' anc* F'd *s fc^e    state energy for
transitions P12> P21> QI;L, Q22> R.^, and R21.
                                      111-22

-------
      The  zero-point energy of a molecule is arbitrary in that only energy differ-
 ances have  significance.   For the constants given by Engleman et al. ,  if the
 vibrational and  rotational (but not spin-splitting)  energies are set  to zero,  the
 level of  zero  electronic  energy is midway between the energies of the  two spin
 split states ( TT^  and   ^3/2^'   If> in addition,  the  spin splitting term A approached
 zero,  the two  spin split  states would collapse into  one energy level defined as
 the zero  electronic energy for this system.   However, we have shifted  this zero
 point energy by  A/2 to  correspond approximately  to the zero  level energy of the
 lower 2TT^ state.   Thus  TQ = A/2,  and Eq.  (49)  becomes
                       T"  = - + G"(v")  +
                           2
                                            F'.1   (J")
                                             1C
                                            F"   (J")
                                              id
(57)
and the upper electronic state energy given by Engleman et al. is increased by
A/2.

     The constants which describe the lower electronic state are given in Table
III-C.  The A doubling constant P has a different sign in Engleman et al.'s
Tables VII and XI.  We have chosen the negative sign because it gives better
agreement between the experimental and theoretical line locations.

     Ill. B. 6. d ^ne_r^y_L£yel_E^u£t^:o_ns_f£r_th1e_A_E_ _Sta_te o_f_NO

                                                       2 +
     The energy levels of the upper electronic state  (A E ) are described by
the general Eq. (47)

                              T' = T  + G(v') + F'(J')                     (58)
where T  is a constant, G(v)  is given by Eq.  (50),  and F(J)  is  given by Engleman
et al. as,

     F^J) = BV(J+0.5)(J-0.5)-DV(J+0.5)2(J-0.5)2+0.5Y(J-0.5)               (59a)


     F2(J) = BV(J+0.5)(J+1.5)-DV(J+0.5)2(J+1.5)2-0.5Y(J+1.5)               (59b)

where F-,(J) is for states with J = K + 1/2 and F2(J)  is  for  states with J  = K  - 1/2,
Of course, all values of J, K, and v are for  the upper electronic state and would
have single primes if any were indicated.  The y is a small  spin splitting constant
and the value used was determined by Bergeman and Zare (1972) from an rf resonance
study.  The constants used to describe the upper state are given in Table  III-D.
                                      111-23

-------
          TABLE III-C


   o
  X IT State Constants for NO

 (from Engleman, et al.  (1970))





    T   =  61.595 cm~1*(=A/2)
     o


    A   =  123.19 cm'1



    C   =  -5.8.10"4 cirT1



    toe  =  1904.405 cm"1



    o)exe=  14.1870 cnT1
    B   =  1.69568 cm"1



    D,T  = 4.5-10"6 cnT1
     v
    P   = -1.17-10 2 cm'1*
    Q   = 7.8-10'5 cm'1
*see text
            111-24

-------
                TABLE III-D

        A2S State Constants for NO
(from Engleman, et al. (1970) except as noted)
           Te   = 43966.2643 cnT1+
           u>e   = 2374.307 cm
           oigX e = 16.106 cm •*-

           Bv   = 1.98576 cm'1

           Dv   = 4. 6-ID"6 cm"1

           Y     = .00276 cm"1*
       +adjusted for different zero references
        from Engleman, et al.

        from Bergeman and Zare (1972).
                  111-25

-------
     111. B. 6 . e.  NO_Y_( 0_, 0) _Band Structure_
                         o       o
     For cases where the  TT^ and  ^^/2 energy levels are noticeably separated
(Hund's case (a))  the band structure of a 2Z - 2-rr transition is usually  considered
as two sub-bands,  Z - 2^ and 2£ - 2l]3/2, which are separated from each  other  by
the amount of doublet splitting of the 2Tr state.  There are six branches  possible
for each of two sub-bands, making a total of twelve branches.  Because of the
small spin splitting in the 2Z state of NO, only eight distinct branches  are re-
solved, but in this study the spin splitting in the 2Z state has been included
based on the value given by Bergeman and Zare (1972).

     The selection rules which determine which upper and lower electronic states
are involved in transitions are explained in detail by Herzberg (1950), and may
be summarized  as follows.   For changes in vibrational  energy,  Av =  v'  -v"= 0,  -  1,
± 2, - 3...,  with the relative strengths determined by the overlap  of the potential
energy curves.   These relative strengths are given by  the Franck-Condon factors.
 Concerning  rotational  levels,  only states of opposite parity may interact,  + *-* -
 + */•+, -*/•-.   This has  an effect  on which of the A-type doubled  levels in the  IT
 state may interact with given upper state levels.   The total angular momentum J
 is restricted  such that AJ = J1  - J" = 0,  ±  1.   Since  the 2u state is intermediate
 between Hund's  cases (a)  and (b),  the selection rule  AN =  N'-N"  =  0,  ±  1  (older
 notation AK =  K'-K")  applies,  but  AN = ±  2  can appear subject to AJ = ± 1,  although
 the intensity  is much  reduced.   Branches for which AJ ? AN  will  generally be weaker.

      These  selection rules imply that there are twelve branches and the labeling
 of those branches is shown in Table III-E.   The notation is the same as that used
 by McGregor et  al. (1973),  and there are additional diagrams in that report ex-
 plaining the  notation.   The following line  pairs are  overlapped due to the small
 spin splitting  in the  upper state:  P22 and Q12;  Qn  and P21; Q22  and R  •  and  R
 and Qoi-
                                      111-26

-------
                             TABLE III-E



                   Notation for Transitions  of  NO
               Rotational     Rotational                    AN=N'-N"

Transition     Upper State    Lower State    AJ=J'-J"    (or AK=K'-K")+
P12(J")    =    F'(J"-1)   -   F"   (J")         -1               -2
                *-               2d
    P( I'M    —    T? ' ( T" i '\       T?"  (i"\           i                i
 i i ^J  /    —    t (J  -i)   -   r   \j )          -i               -±
 •L±             1               Ic
    Pf T" \    _    TT ! f T11 1 \       T?"/'T!^           1                1
 ooW ;    -    ^0^.J  ~L)   -   r   (J  )          -i               -1
 •"             2               ^c


P21(J")    =    F2(J"-1)   -   F"  (J")          -1                0




Ql.2(J")    =    F|(J")     -   F2'c  (J">          0               -I





Q-j^-LCJ")    =    F'(J")     -   F"  (J")           0                0






Q99(J")    =    FMJ")     -   F"  (J")           0                0
 z z             2.               ^u





Q21(J")    =    F2(J")     -   F^(J")           0               +1
Rno(J")    =    FMJ'M-l)   -   F"  (J")          +1
 1^             J-              ?j
Rn(J")
ROO(J")    =    F;(J"+D   -   F"  (j")          +1              +1
 2.L             *-              2c
R01(J")    =    Fl(J"+l)   -   F"  (J")          +1              +2
 21             L              Id
+the newer notation replaces K with N.
                               HI-27

-------
                  C  Experimental  Results -  Spectroscopic Measurements

 III.C.I.   Determination  of  Broadening  Parameters

      111. C. 1. a.   IJa£kground_

      In  the discussion of the  development of  transmission formulas,  it was  shovm
 that all  quantities  necessary  to  calculate  the  transmission have been determined
 except for the broadening parameter a' and  the  oscillator strength   v'v"*   Reas-
 onable literature values exist for the oscillator strength, but there is no
 concensus  for the broadening parameters.

      There are several techniques for  studying  pressure broadening.  When the
 rotational lines  are closely spaced, as is  the  case for the NO Y  (0,0)  band,
 direct line shape measurements are difficult.   A curve of growth technique  may
 be  used at various pressures and, with a knowledge of the oscillator strength,
 the broadening may be determined.  This technique was used by Thorson and Badger
 (1957) to  determine  a collision diameter for NO broadening in the Y  (0,0) band
 by  N2.  A  similar analysis  was performed more recently by Tajime et  al. (1978),
 but serious  deficiencies in their theoretical model were pointed out by Dodge and
 Dusek (1979).  Davis et  al.  (1976) utilized a narrow-line absorption technique
 to  study NO  broadening by ^ but, again, serious problems in their theoretical
 model were pointed out by Dodge and Dusek (1978) .  Hadeishi et al. (1976) used
 a Zeeman  tuned Cd lamp to determine the profile of a single NO line  in the  Y
 (1,0) band.  (They report measurements of the 0-1 vibrational band of NO at
 214.438 nm,  but the  Y (0,1)  band  is at about 236 nm, so we assume the measure-
 ments were for the Y (1,0)  band.)  The results  of Tajime et al. (1978) and
 Davis et al. (1976)  are  in  question because of  the theoretical problems, but the
 measurements by Thorson  and Badger (1957) and Hadeishi et al. (1976) may be in
 reasonable agreement.  Unfortunately (or significantly), the results reported
 here  are substantially different than  in those  two papers.

      A number of  measurements  of the NO Y (0,0) band oscillator strength have
 been  made, and, in contrast with the broadening measurements, there  is reasonable
 agreement  for most of the literature values.  The results reported here are
 similar to published values.   The problems associated with different techniques
used  to measure oscillator  strengths are discussed by Thome (1974) .

      Ill. C. 1. b.  jPr£c.£d_ure_

     The technique used  in  this study for the oscillator strength and broadening
measurements of the NO Y (0,0)  band was unique  in that the rotational structure
of the band was resolved and actual individual  line shapes and strengths were
determined photometrically.   This requires a resolution of about 130,000 at
225 nm.   With the additional ability to scan a  spectrum with photoelectric de-
tection,  it is possible  to  avoid the nonlinear response of photographic plates.
                                      III-2P

-------
 Commercial instruments with these specifications have only recently become
 available.  In addition, a sophisticated computer model developed jointly at
 Arnold Engineering Development Center (AEDC) and this laboratory was required
 for reducing the data.

      The individual line profiles were recorded mostly in the spectral region
 between the P^ and P22 bandheads where the lines were separated most clearly.
 All of these lines originated in the  ^3/0 ground state.   A few measurements
 were recorded in the P-Q bandhead region to examine lines originating in the
 in the  ^1/2 ground state.

     All  room temperature broadening measurements were made with the  high  pressure
 Xe DC arc  lamp  (continuum  source),  the  static  cell  and associated  gas mixing
 apparatus,  and the high resolution  spectrometer which were  previously described.
 The  ratiometric  electronics were used for  recording  some  spectra while others
 were recorded directly (Fig.  18).

     The  cell was  first filled  with  about  5  torr (6.7  Pa) of  10% NO diluted  in Ar
 and  a  scan  was taken to determine the slit function  of the  instrument, along with
 a  small contribution from the Doppler broadened gas.   The slit  function varied
 slightly  in shape  and width over several hours  while data were  being  recorded,
 but  the best  fit to the experimental values  could be obtained with a  Gaussian.
 Our  slit  function  was slightly  wider near  the base than a Gaussian, but  it did
 not  possess the wings characteristic of  a  Lorentzian.   A  more complicated  slit
 function  such as given by Kusch et al.  (1977) did not  seem  warranted.  The effect
 of convolving a slit function with the actual spectral shape  is  discussed by
 Thorne  (1974), Kusch et al.  (1977),  and  Sulzmann et  al (1976).   The convolution
 technique used here is described in  the  computer program  description  (Appendix D)
 The measured  FWHM  for the slit  function  was  typically  0.0018 nm  while the Doppler
 FWHM was 0.00051 nm.   This  slit  function was monitored  several times during
 each data set.  For Gaussians,  the half  widths  combine  as (Av)  = (Av^)" +
 (Av2)2 +  .  .  .  (Thorne (1974)),  and  since  both  the slit function and Doppler
 shape are Gaussians,  the actual  slit  function FWHM was  typically  .00173 nm.  In
 comparison, the range of FWHM for N2  for which  broadening data were reduced was
 0.00562 to  0.00965  nm,  so slight variations  in  the slit function  (±0.0002 nm)
 had negligible effect on the  measured  profiles.   An  example spectrum at low pres-
 sures is shown in  Fig.  23.

     After  the slit  function  was determined, the  gases  were blended to arrive at a
 constant NO number  density  for  a given final pressure,  independent of diluent gas.
 Spectra were  recorded at total  pressures of  0.50  atm  (50.7  kPa), 0.75 atm  (76.0
 kPa), 1.00  atm (101  kPa), 1.50  atm (152  kPa), and  2.00  atm  (203  kPa).  Experi-
mentally recorded  spectra for NO broadening  by  N2  over  this range of  pressures are
 shown in Figs. 24-28.   Similar  spectra were  obtained for  NO diluted in C02,
 CO  Ar, and CH^.   These experimental  spectra were  compared  with  computer generated
 spectra such  as those shown  in  Figs.  29-31,  which  correspond to  N2 broadening at
                                       111-29

-------
                                                                               FIG. 23
            DOPPLER BROADENING (O.OOOSnm) AND SLIT FUNCTION (0.0015nm)


                                     PT = 0.0076 ATM

                                     Pwn£s3.5 1017CM~2
  C/J
  Z
  Q
  111
  CO
ZERO
                                         111-30
                                                                            79-04-93-15

-------
                                                                                      FIG. 24
                                NO ABSORPTION SPECTRUM
PT = 0.50 ATM

PJ2-= 2.59 • 10
                                                 17   ~2
 H
 w
 z
 Q
 LU
 CO
 2
 <
 
-------
                                NO ABSORPTION SPECTRUM

                                    PT = 0.75 ATM
                                    PN£= 3.89 • 1017 CM~2
                                                                                  FIG. 25
ZERO
                                           111-32
                                                                              79-04-93-17

-------
                                  NO ABSORPTION SPECTRUM
                                       PT - 1.00 ATM

                                       Pojrr£= 5.18 • 1017 CM~2
                                                                                        FIG. 26
  Q
  LLJ
  H


  co
  Z
  <
  EC
ZERO
                                                                                    79-04-93-18
                                              111-33

-------
                                NO ABSORPTION SPECTRUM



                                      PT = 1.50 ATM

                                      PN^= 5.18 •  1017 CM~2
                                                                                    FIG. 27
  c/5
  z
  LU
  Q
  LU
  in
  z
ZERO1	L
                                                                                 79-04-93-19
                                           111-34

-------
                                 NO ABSORPTION SPECTRUM
                                                                                     FIG. 28
                                         2.00 ATM
                                          = 5.18 • 10  CM
                                                 17   ~2
  co
  z
  LJJ
  H
   Q
   LU
   CO
ZERO
                                                                                  79-04-93-20
                                            111-35

-------
              1.25-,
              1.00 —
              0.75-
              0.58 —
              0.25-H
             0  00
                                     COMPUTER SPECTRUM


                                         PT = 0.75ATM
      TA =  295.  K
      L  =  18.6 CM
      A  =  4.38609
      DLAM=   .0183
      F=3.57,  3  75
      GAUSSIAN LNSHPTHEOR
        NO
       .0000
        2039+17
                                           LINES
                          I
                 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10
I
o
c.
I
ID
U
I
2265.2        2265.6        2266.8        2266.4        2266 8

       2265.4        2265 8       2266.2        2266.6

                         WAVELENGTH, A
                             (nm x 10)


-------
(D
I
O

I
1C
u
1.25-1
1.80-
8.75-
8.50-
0.25-
8 80
                                     COMPUTER SPECTRUM

                                          PT = 1.00ATM

                      TE =   690.  K
                      TA =   295.  K             NO
                      L  =   18.6  CM            8000
                      A  =   5  84700            2784+17
                      DLAM=    .0183
                      3 57,   3  75
                      GAUSSIAN LNSHPTHEOR.  LINES
             T
                                 I
I   '   I   '    I
    2266.0
                                            I
2265.2        2265.6        2266.0       2266  4        2266  8

       2265.4        2265 8       2266  2        2266  6

                         WAVELENGTH, A
                             (nm x 10)
                                                                             Tl

                                                                             C>
                                                                             CO
                                                                             o

-------
                                     COMPUTER SPECTRUM
             1  00 —
             0.75-
             0 59-
             0.25 —
             0  80
                                          PT = 1 .50ATM
IE =  680. K
TA =  295. K
L  =  13.6 CM
A  =  8 77189
DLAM=   .0183
3 57  3  75
GAUSSIAN LNSHPTHEOR
                                                HO
                                               .0900
                                               .2734*17
                                           LINES
                                       I
1C
I
o
to
u
             '    I   7
2265.2       2265.6

       2265.4       2265  8
                    r   7   r
                    2266 0
      r  1   i   r

       2266.4
1   I
2266  8
2266.2
                                         2266 6
                  WAVELENGTH, A
                      (nm x 10)
                                       P
                                       u

-------
pressures  of  0.75  a tin  (76.0  kPa) .  1.00  atm  (101  kPa) ,  and  1.50  atm (152  kPa) .
The  spectral  lines in  Figs.  24-28  are identified in  Table  III-F.

     At these NO densities,  there  is significant absorption  between  even the most
widely spaced lines  over most  of the pressure  range  studied.  Thus the zero ab-
sorption baseline  must be  determined.   Even with the dual-beam  ratiometric
electronics small  amounts  of drift  occurred in the zero  absorption signal.  The
baseline was  determined in two ways.  First, the zero  absorption  signals before
and  after  the runs were averaged and called the  estimated  baseline (EST.  BASE, in
Figs. 24-28) .   Second,  for the higher pressure cases,  the  computer spectra were
used to estimate a baseline  and called  computer  baseline (COMPUTER BASE,  in Figs.
24-28).  These  agreed  very well for the N2 and Ar data.  The C02  and  CH^ generally
showed somewhat more absorption in  the  wings than predicted by  the computer model,
and  thus,  the estimated baseline was as much as  5 percent  higher  than the computer
baseline relative  to zero  transmission  for the worst case  at 2  atm (203  kPa) con-
dition.  Such a comparison for CO  could not be made  easily because pure  CO gas
absorbed significantly in  the  region of interest as  shown  in Fig.  32.  None of the
other gases showed any absorption  in this region.  All data were  reduced relative
to the computer baseline.

     Reported data are only  for the Q22 (9.5)  +  R,2  (9.5)  line  pair and  the Q22
(10.5) + R12  (10.5)  line pair  and  for the pressure range of 1.00  atm  (101 kPa)
to 2.00 atm (203 kPa) .  This pressure was selected to  reduce uncertainties from
changes in the  slit  function.  However, at the lower pressures  where  half widths
could be measured  for  all  lines, the widths were consistent, and  independent
of J value within  experimental precision.  At  all pressures there  was excellent
agreement  between  the  computer predicted spectral shape  and the observed  profiles.
The  same pressure  broadening value  gave an excellent match between experimental
and  computed  spectra for transitions originating in  the  ^2 state f°r  the
pressures 0.75 atm  (76.0 kPa) ,  1.00 atm  (101 kPa) , and 1.32 atm  (133 kPa) , as
shown in Figs. 33 and  34.

     III.C.l.c  Low Temperature j5ro^ieriing_Data_ ami r^iscu_s^ion_

     A listing of the  typical experimental results for the broadening of NO by N~ ,
C02 , CO, CH/ , and Ar is given in Table III-G.  This table gives an indication of
scatter in the data.   All error bands in Table III-G are la of the experimental
data and do not reflect systematic errors.  It is estimated that the broadening
parameters C and K are accurate to within 15 percent.

     As discussed in the section on broadening theory, the Lorentz theory gives the
temperature dependence of a' as a' = CP/T, while the Weisskopf theory results in
a' = KP/T    (Thorne (1974)).  The optical collision diameter d is also shown.
                                                                         2
As discussed previously, collision cross-sections are defined as either d  or
Trd2.
                                       111-39

-------
                        TABLE III-F
       SPECTRAL LINES USED FOR BROADENING MEASUREMENTS
Group
Number
1
2
Line
Identification
P22(15.5)
Q12(15.5)
Q22(8-5)
R12(8.5)
F (26.5)
Wavelength
(ran) or (X/10)
226.66669
226.66647
226.652A7
226.65234
226.65156
Wavenumber
(cm-1)
44117.642
44117.685
44120.410
44120.436
44120.587
3

4
6

7
.(4.5)
R22(5.5)

P22(17.5)
Q22(17.5)
           Q22(10.5)
           R12(10.5)
                   226.64758
226.60194

226.59325
226.59300

226.57724
226.57708
                   44121.363
P22(16.5)
Q12(16.5)
Q22(9.5)
R19(9.5)
226.63137
226.63113
226.61623
226.61608
44124.519
44124.564
44127.466
44127.496
                                   44130.248

                                   44131.941
                                   44131.989

                                   44135.060
                                   44135.091
+Theoretically determined (difference in upper and lower energies)
 These are slightly different if experimental line locations by
 Engleman et al. (1970) or Deezsi (1958) are used.
                           111-40

-------
               ABSORPTION BY CO COINCIDENT WITH 7(0,0) BAND OF NO
                                 a = —LOGe (l°/ll
                                   pi


                                 p... PARTIAL PRESSURE, ATM


                                 !L... PATH LENGTH, CM

                                 l°/l... 1/TRANSMISSION

                                 T = 296K
5x10
    -3r
                     ESTIMATED STANDARD DEVIATION
  O


 7
   .  2
1C
I
o

I

u
I
                                           I
                                                      I
          220
                     22?
222        223        224

       WAVELENGTH, nm
225
226
227
                                                                                                             P
                                                                                                             w
                                                                                                             to

-------
                                                                                      FIG, 33
                              SPECTRUM NEAR PH BANDHEAD


                                     PT = 1 ATM

                                     PNO£=1.82-1017 CM"2
  to
  Z
  LLJ
  H
  Z

  Q
  LLJ




  CO
  Z

  DC
ZERO
                                            111-42
                                                                                   79-04-93-22

-------
                              COMPUTER SPECTRUM NEAR P-|-| BANDHEAD
                                    PT = 1ATM,
                                             = 1.82 • 1017 CM 2
             1.25-n
             1.00-
             0.75-
             0.50-
             0.60
TA «  296. K              NO
L  «  18.6 CM            .0000
A  «  5 82600            .9780*16
DLAM=    0170
F=3 5^  3 78
GAUSSIAN LNSHP THEOR  LINES
                     .  i . . I  .  ,  ,  . I .  .  .  .  I . .  .  .  ,  . . .  .  I  .  . . T !
                2262.25  2262.50  2262 75  2263 00  2263.25  2263.50  2263.75
u
                  NAUELENGTH>
                      (nm x 10)
                                                                                            p
                                                                                            CO

-------
                         TABLE III-G
             BROADENING PARAMETERS FOR NO y(0,0)
(A2Z-X2ir)  TRANSITIONS (ALL TOLERANCES ARE + la OF MEASURED DATA)

Gas
N2
N2
N2
N2
co2
CO 2

CO 2

co2
CO

CO

CO

CO
CH4

CH4

CH4
CH4
Ar

Ar

Ar

Ar

Pressure
(atm)
1.00
1.50
2.00
AVG
1.00
1.50

2.00

AVG.
1.00

1.50

2.00

AVG.
1.00

1.50

2.00
AVG
1.00

1.50

2.00

AVG

FWHM
(nm)
.00562
.00743
.00965
.00565
.00720
+.00040
.00961
+.00035

.00580
+.00013
.00747
+.00050
.01038
+.00010

.00635
+.00033
.G0836
+.00013
.01041

.00490
+.00029
.00638
+.00016
.00803
+.00040

Slit
Function a'
(nm)
.00176 6.04
8.50
11.31
.00191 5.75
8.12

11.17


.00148 6.02

8.47

12.10


.00160 6.90

9.63

10.41

.00181 4.25

6.95

9.22



C K
atm"1 K atm"1 K1'2
1800
1689
1685
1725 5383
1705
1605

1656

1655 5165
1782

1671

1791

1748 5455
2046

1904

1803
1918 5986
1258

1371

1365

1331 4154

d
(nm)


1.13





1.17






1.15





1.10






1.04
                            111-44

-------
     There are  two  items of note  in Table III-G.  First,  the  collision para-
meters  for the  gases  shown are very nearly  the same with  the  exception of
argon which  is  only a minor constituent of  air fed combustion except  in  some
research- type flames.  This implies that the  calibration  for  NO absorption
will be relatively  unaffected for various proportions of  the  gases shown
assuming the gases  have the same  relative collision efficiency at elevated
temperatures.   Absent from Table  III-G are  two major species, H20 and 02.
Water vapor  measurements could not be made  with a room  temperature cell,
although data were  extracted from broadening  measurements  in  l^/C^/Ar flames
as will be discussed.  An effort was made to  measure broadening by 02, but
the oxidation of NO to N02 in the presence  of strong ultraviolet light was
too rapid  to make precise measurements.  However, it was  estimated from  the
recorded spectra that the broadening parameter for 02 was  not significantly
different  from  the  other gases tested and that its value  was  between  that
of Ar and  N2.   Because of the similarity in molecular size, calculations for
flames  were  made assuming that N2 and 02 have the same  collision parameter.
The convenience of  a  calibration almost independent of  the gas composition should
be  contrasted   with the extreme dependence  shown for NO measurements by  fluore-
scence  (Schwarz, 1975).   it should be noted  that the data in Table III-G are
for a constant  NO density independent of pressure, so anomalously large  self-
broadening by NO cannot explain the relative  independence of molecular type on
the broadening  parameter.

    The magnitude of  the collision cross-sections shown in Table III-G are much
larger  than  previously reported,  and may revive an argument that has existed in
literature for  some time.  It was reported  by Lambrey (1929,  1930) and by Naude
(1930) that  the y system of NO showed abnormally large pressure broadening.   An
explanation  offered by Moore, Wulf , and Badger (1953) was that. this might be due
to induced predisssociation.  The suggestion  of abnormally large broadening was
opposed by Gaydon and Fairbairn (1954) and  Thorson and Badger (1957) .  All of
these measurements were made with photographic plates, which  present a much more
difficult problem for reducing line widths  than the photometric data recorded in
this study.  It is not clear what constitutes abnormally large broadening,
but our results are in conflict with those  of the latter two  references.   For
a partial pressure  of NO (PNQ) of 2 torr (267 Pa) and a path  length ££)   of  15 cm,
and a total pressure with N2 of 1 atm  (101 kPa) , Gaydon and Fairbairn (1954)
estimate the true half-breadth or -width of a line is less than .025 A  (.0025
nm) .  In this study, the corresponding value is .00562 run including the slit
function and ~. 0050 nm after deconvolving the slit function.  Here, the optical
depth was less, i.e., P^Q =.85 torr (113 Pa) and & =18.6 cm.  Since the total
pressure was the same, narrower lines rather than broader lines should have been
observed.  Similarly, collision cross-sections of this study are significantly
greater than those of Thorson and Badger (1957) for T (0,0)  lines  and those of
Hadeishi et al. (1976) for y (1,0) lines as shown in Table III-H.   Included in
the table are collision diameters from viscosity data, although it is not
                                       111-45

-------
                                        TABLE III-H

                            Comparison of Collision Diameters for
                                Broadening of NO y (0,0) Lines


Foreign                       Optical Collision Diameter (nm)                        Diameter
Gas              This           Thorson &          Hadeishi          Tajime          from Viscosity
                 Study          Badger             et al             et al           (nm)

N2               1.13           .38                .32+              .66*            .37

C02              1.17                                                                .39

CO               1.15                                                                .36

CH,              1.10                                                                .38
  4

Ar               1.04                                                                .34


 Assuming their collision cross-section of 1.0-10~15 cm  is defined as d  in agreement with
 their references of Mitchell and Zemansky (1961).

*Based on incorrect theoretical model (see Dodge and Dusek (1979)), but Tajime et al. maintain
 that results will probably not drastically change.

*Hirschfelder, Curtiss, and Bird (1954)

-------
unusual for optical collision diameters  to be  larger  than  those  from viscosity
data (Engleman (1969), Townes and Schawlow  (1955), Mitchell  and  Zemansky (1971)).
     1 1 1 . C . 1 . d . _H ijjh_Temp_e r_a_t^£e_B^ojid j;n_ing_ I) a_t a_an.d_DjL S^US_SJL ori

    The same procedure was used  to measure the actual  line  profiles  in the
H2/C>2/Ar flames.  However, the relative precision  of these  measurements was less
than that for  the room temperature static cell data because the  line widths were
much narrower.  A FWHM of about  0.0031 nm was typical  with  a slit  function FWHM
of about 0.0018 nm.  Thus, the actual line width without  the instrument function
was about 0.0024 nm which is not significantly larger  than  the slit  function.
The measured a' values are shown in Fig. 35 for four H2/02/Ar flames.   Data are
also shown for three CH4/02/N2 flames, which are quite similar.  The solid line
is for an a' given by the Weisskopf theory  and the dotted  line  for  the Lorentz
theory.  However, values of the broadening parameters  C and K were estimated for
both H20 and 02-   Oxygen was  assumed  to be as  efficient  as  N2  as a broadener,
which is probably  reasonable.  Water  vapor is  not  similar to any of  the molecules
tested, but  was  assumed  to be  an efficient broadener slightly  stronger than CH^,
which has a  similar molecular  weight.  For  these  assumptions,  the Weiskopf model
fit the measured data within  experimental precision.   Perhaps more significantly,
actual line  profiles were determined  at flame  temperatures  independent of any
extrapolations from room  temperature, albeit with  some uncertainty.

III.C.2.  Determination of Oscillator Strength

    III. C. 2. a.   CoritjLnuum Lamp_,_  Prp_cedu_r£ _and_ _Resu_lt_s

    The oscillator strength was  determined from  the  same  experimental data used
for the broadening measurements.   The procedure was  to measure  the peak absorp-
tions on the same  line pairs  over  the same pressure  range and  to compare that
data with results  from the computer model.  Peak heights  rather  than areas were
used to reduce the errors due  to baseline uncertainty, and  to  simplify data
reduction.   For  the region between the P,-, and P ~o bandheads used  for the
broadening measurements, all  absorption lines  are  due  to  transitions connected  with
the ^3/2 level.  Since Spindler et al . (1970) suggested  that the  strengths of  the
transitions  connected with the   T]_/2  state are about 6 percent larger than those for
the  TT3/2 state, separate measurement of the oscillator strength was made near
the PU bandhead region for transitions originating in the  ^3/2 state, as shown
in Fig 33.   The results are given  in  Table III-I.  Data are shown  for NO
mixtures in  various diluent gases, but, of course, the oscillator  strength must
be independent of the diluent  gas.  Since the  NO/^ mixture was  confirmed indep-
endently of  the gas vendor, the  oscillator strength values  for  that  mixture were
used.  The uncertainty in these  values is estimated  to be + 10 percent.
                                        111-47

-------
                                              MEASURED NO BROADENING PARAMETER IN FLAMES
£••
00
     ID
     I
     O
1.5

1.4

1.3

1.2

1.1

1.0

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2
WEISSKOPF THEORY

               2°  ' U2
                      SOLID LINE a' = a'Ar + a'H  o + a'o
                                      _P	
                                      - 1.2
                                KAr=4154, K
                         1000
                                   1200
                                                                        LORENTZ THEORY
                                                                DASHED LINE   a'= a Ar + a u.n + a n
                                                                              a  = CP/T

                                                                              CAr = 1331, C    = 2000
                                                                                       =1725
                                                                            O  H2/02/Ar


                                                                            A  CH4/O2/N2 0= 0.8


                                                                            D  CH4/02/N2 0=1.0


                                                                            0  CH4/O2/N2 0= 1.2
                                           1400
                                          TEMPERATURE, K
1600
1800
2000
                                                                                                                                                 O
                                                                                                                                                 (O
                                                                                                                                                 en

-------
                        TABLE III-I

   OSCILLATOR STRENGTHS FOR THE NO y(0,0)  (A2£+-X  TT)  BAND
                    FOR DIFFERENT GASES*
                                       fo,o
NO Diluted In          A2Z+-X2Tr3/2          A^-X2

N2                     3.57 + 0.06f         3.72 +  .23

C02                    3.54 + O.OOA

CH4                    3.51+0.02

Ar                     3.27+0.06
  The  oscillator  strength must  be  independent  of  diluent  gas,  so the
 variation in values  is  indicative of  the experimental error.
                           111-49

-------
                                                        TABLE III-J
                                     OSCILLATOR STRENGTHS (f   ) FOR THE NO y(0,0) BAND:
                                                  LITERATURE SUMMARY
                   Author
i
w
o
Weber & Penner  (1957)

Bethke (1959)

Antropov, et al.  (1964)

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Jeunehomme  (1966)

Jeunehotmne  (1966)

Farmer, Hasson, Nicholls
(1972)

Hasson, Farmer, Nicholls,
Anketell (1972)

Average

Huber and Herzberg  (1979) Recommended Value

This Study  (
Interpreted By

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Pery-Thorne & Banfield  (1970)

Jeunehomme (1966)

Farmer, et al. (1972)


Hasson, et al. (1972)
                                                                                                  O.O
4.1 + 0.8

3.99 + 0.4

3.9 + 0.8

3.64 + .05

3.0

3.8 + 0.3

4.01 + .2


4.09 + .1
4.33 + .2

3.87

3.8

3.72 + 0.4

-------
      These results are compared with some previous values  in  Table  III-J.   The
 value for the  TTI/O state was chosen for comparison as  it  is  the more  heavily
 populated state (by a factor of 1.8) at room temperature.  The  oscillator
 strength determined in this study agrees well with the  previous results, but appears
 to be slightly lower than the most reliable values.  However, this  study is
 unique in that the oscillator strength has been measured directly from individual
 lines in high resolution.  We are not familiar with any previous work  which
 provides such a direct measure of individual line strengths.


     Ill. C . 2 . b.  Narrow--LjLne_ l^amp^ P_rocedu_re^ and_ Resu_lt_s_

     The broadening data  determined by the continuum lamp were used  in  the model
to predict transmission by the narrow-line lamp.  The oscillator strengths were
adjusted from  those determined by the continuum lamp in  order  to match  experimental
data obtained with the narrow-line lamp.  The oscillator strength should be  same
for both models, but several sources of error can cause  small  differences.

     The narrow-line lamp contains a small amount of radiation not accounted
for in the model.  This can be seen by comparing Figs. 21 and  22 which  display
output from the narrow-line lamp before and after absorption by  a low pressure
NO sample.  The major peaks denoted 1-5 show absorption  as  predicted by the
model, but the low level  light between the peaks is not  absorbed by  the NO.  This
tends to decrease the f value required to fit experimental  data.  An estimate of
the effect of  the "extra-light" on f value is shown in Table III-K along with the
values determined for the narrow-line lamp before correction.  There may be other
factors  associated with this difference in f values, such as a shift in frequency
for the  emission lines due to the strong electric fields in the  lamp, but these
have not been  investigated.

III.C.3  Summary of Hot Calibration Device Data

     111.C. 3. a  F_lowing_ Gas_ Hea.ter_:_ _Summa_ry_o_f_ ^onj^ntrj^tjixm  and_ T_emperature_ Dat_a_

     The carrier flow rate through the flowing gas heater was  held constant
at 0.109 moles/sec for all temperatures and gases.  Typical concentration and
temperature profiles are  depicted in Figs. 8-10 and 36.  Various concentrations
of nitric oxide were added to the main gas flow at each  temperature, and for
each condition gas samples were extracted from the center of the optical axis
and analyzed using the chemiluminescence detector.  Although measured values
were nearly always lower  than the calculated seed level, the two values were
usually within 7%.  Predicted nitric oxide concentrations from the optical
measurements are compared to the average of the seed and measured values.
                                        111-51

-------
                          TABLE III-K
        OSCILLATOR STRENGTHS (fQ Q) FOR NO y(0,0) BAND:
                         A COMPARISON
                                       104
                                             Narrow-Line Lamp
               Continuum     Narrow-Line     With "Extra-Light"
Transition     Lamp          Lamp            Correction

               3.72          3.53            3.76

               3.57          3.20            3.43
                            IH-52

-------
                                                                       FIG. 36
      NITRIC OXIDE PROFILES OVER FLOWING GAS HEATER


                  AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES
                   O CENTERLINE TEMPERATURE = 560K


                   Q CENTERLINE TEMPERATURE = 640K

                   £ CENTER LINE TEMPERATURE = 753K


                     CHEMI
   1.0r
   0.8
 LLJ
 IS)
   0.6
 CO
 <
 LU

-? 0.4
 CM
   0.2
   0.0
              t
      El
                         468


                     DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
10
         12
                                                                    79-04-54-6
                               111-53

-------
II I.C. 3. b
                Flat Flame Burner :_ j[ummary_ o^f jCon£en_t£at^ion_and_T«n£e£a_txi£e_D£ta^
     For the optical measurements of NO, four flame conditions were selected.
The thermocouple temperatures (uncorrected for radiation) at the centerline
were 950, 1220, 1400 and 1600 K.  The flow conditions for these flames are
listed in Table II-B.  Profiles of thermocouple temperatures and radiation
corrections are shown in Figs. 17 and 37-39.  Various NO concentrations were
introduced into the unburned gas for all four flame conditions.  Concentration
profiles (normalized) are shown in Fig. 16.  Except for a few high seed levels
of NO during the gas correlation experiments, all nitric oxide was introduced
using the 10% NO and 90% Ar mixtures.  The excess argon associated with the
added NO is not included in the tables and typically amounts to 1 to 2% of the
total gas flow.  For several of the gas correlation experiments, the 25% NO,
75% Ar mixtures were used to reduce the effect of the added argon.  Once con-
servation of nitric oxide had been confirmed using mass spectrometric analysis,
it was not necessary to repeat these measurements for all tests.  During the
UTRC optical measurements, therefore, only cold flow measurements of NO in Ar
were made before and after each set of experiments.  These measurements were
made to verify orifice calibrations and to ensure that leaks or other problems
did not develop in the gas handling system.  Concentrations of nitric oxide
during flame conditions were determined using calculated flow rates and assuming
complete combustion to water.  Since the total concentration of other species
such as H2 , I^O? and radicals is rather small, this later assumption provides
a good and simple approximation.  According to techniques outlined in
Section II.B.3.d, the mass spectrometric data were reduced to provide the
profiles of other species within the flame.  These data are reproduced in
Figs. 40 and 41 for two flame conditions.

     Profiles of nitric oxide and optical measurements over the burner assembly
were also made at room temperature for comparison with the FGH and the static
cell.  The profile data is reproduced in Fig. 42.

III.C.4  Narrow-Line Calibration Study

     As previously mentioned, one of the principal goals of the first phase of
this contract was the development of a model for predicting the transmission
of narrow-line NO radiation through a gas containing NO molecules at temperature
range from 300K to 2000K.   The validity of the model would be certainly estab-
lished if an agreement of approximately ^ 10% in NO concentration between theo-
retical prediction and measurement was achieved.  The bulk of the data presented
in this section are within the specified tolerance.  Those data that are not
within this tolerance reflect some of the experimental difficulties associated
with NO chemistry and measurement.
                                       IH-54

-------
                                                                        FIG. 37
 HORIZONTAL TEMPERATURE PROFILES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER

                              H2/02/Ar

                    UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 950K
                    O  UNCORRECTED (THERMOCOUPLE)
                       TEMPERATURES
                    A  RADIATION CORRECTION
  1200
  1000
   800
^  600
   400
   200
       	A
                          I
                                    I
                                              I
                          468

                      DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
 ifl	B
10
12
                                                                    79-04-54-12
                                111-55

-------
                                                                     FIG. 38
HORIZONTAL TEMPERATURE PROFILES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER

                             H2/O2/Ar

                  UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 1220K
                         5/1/78
                         5/5/78
                       UNCORRECTED
                       TEMPERATURE
                         RADIATION CORRECTION
 1600
 1400
    0 —
—3—5——<
                                        — -0-0
 1200
 1000
  800
  600
 400
 200 -
                       -a-
                        -fi	8-
                                 _L
                                           .
                                             m   n
                        468
                    DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                                            10
12
                                                                  79-04-64-13
                               111-56

-------
                                                                        FIG. 39
HORIZONTAL TEMPERATURE PROFILES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER

                              H2/02/Ar
                   UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 1600K
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
 800
 600
 400
                     5/8/78
          O UNCORRECTED (THERMOCOUPLE)
            TEMPERATURES
          A RADIATION CORRECTION
 2001
                        I
I	H
                        468

                    DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
         10
12
                                                                     79-04-54-15
                               111-57

-------
                                                                          FIG. 40
HORIZONTAL PROFILES OF MAJOR SPECIES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER


                                H2/O2/Ar


                     UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 950 K


                          MASS SPEC ANALYSIS

                         T = 950K(UNCORRECTED)


                                PROBE B
 2
 g


 o
 <
 cc
 u.

 LU
 _J
 O
     1.0
     0.6
     0.4
 0.2
                                                             D  Ar
0.10


   <

0.08




0.06




0.04




0.02
   \



0.00
                                      _L
                                                    0/0
                                                             O  02



                                                             0  H20


                                                             V  co,
JE	B_
        0.0       2.0        4.0        6.0        8.0


                         DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                                                      10.0
        12.0
                                                                       79-04-54-
                                                                                10
                                 111-58

-------
                                                                                FIG. 41
 HORIZONTAL PROFILES OF MAJOR SPECIES OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER


                                  H2/02/Ar

                       UNCORRECTED TEMPERATURE = 1220K

                             MASS SPEC ANALYSIS

                           T = 1220K (UNCORRECTED)

                                  PROBE B
   1.00
   0.80
CJ
<
cr
LL
LLJ
   0.60
   0.40
   0.20
    0.0
                                                                D  Ar

                                                                A  N-,
   0.12


   0.10


   0.08


   0.06


   0.04


   0.02


    0.0
I
           I
                                    O  02

                                    0  H2o
j	H
IB
       0.0       2.0        4.0        6.0         8.0

                        DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
                               10.0
                     12.0
                                                                           79-04-54-11
                                    111-59

-------
                                                                        FIG. 42
 NO HORIZONTAL PROFILE OVER FLAT FLAME BURNER (COLD FLOW)
    1.0*
    0.8
 UJ
J/5
<   0.6
O
z
 <
 LLJ
~   0.4
O


    0.2
    0.0
                     O PROBE D
                       NOSEED-314ppm
                       CHEMILUMINESCENT ANALYZER
                       ROOM TEMPERATURE
                          J_
J.
                        '
    468
DISTANCE FROM CENTERLINE (cm)
a.
                                                        10
                              12
                                                                    79-04-
                                111-60

-------
     Ill. C. 4. a  Sta.tjLc_Cel_l Opt_ica_l Mea.su_rement_s_

     A number of tests were performed in an 18.6 cm long static cell at room
temperature.  Tests were performed in high resolution on single line pairs
and in low resolution (.146 nm FWHM) using gases blended with the gas mixing
system and gas mixtures obtained from vendors.  Data were obtained for a pres-
sure range of .0627 atm (6.35 kPa) to 1.32 atm  (134 kPa).  Some of these data
for low resolution scans with gases (NO diluted in N2) checked against National
Bureau of  Standards reference gases and used without dilution are shown in
Table III-L.  The table lists the cylinder concentration (NO in M2 by volume),
total pressure, optical depth, and the measured transmission for the two band-
heads which are displayed for a spectra at this resolution in Fig. D-8.  The
first bandhead is located at about 226.8 nm and the second is located at
about 226.15 nm.  Also given in Table III-L is the transmission as predicted
by the computer model, and an estimate of the error that would be incurred in
predicting the NO concentration in the static cell from the measured trans-
mission and the computer model.  Since the NO concentration is approximately
proportional to In T, where T is the transmission, the error E is defined by
E=l - (In TPRED/ln TMEAS _) , which is multiplied by 100 to convert a percent
error.  Thus,  if the known NO concentration is multiplied by the factor (1 + E) ,
the predicted and measured transmission values will agree.   This same definition
is used for the flowing gas heater and flat flame burner, except than the factor
(1 + E) is multiplied by the probe determined NO profile for agreement between
predicted  and measured transmissions.

     These tests were used to obtain an estimate of the apparent line width of
the narrow-line source, and the effective oscillator strength.  The line width in
the source could not be measured directly, but could be inferred, from measurements
in the static cell over a range of pressures.  At the higher pressures, the ab-
sorption is almost independent of the source line width, and the absorption data
at these pressures were used to determine the effective oscillator strength when
using the  narrow-line lamp.  The oscillator strength determined in this manner
resulted in a slightly smaller value than that determined with the continuum source
as shown in Table III-K, with the difference attributable (at least partly) to the
"extra light" in the narrow-line lamp, as discussed previously.  At the lower
pressures, the emission line width from the lamp becomes comparable with the ab-
sorption line width, and the transmittance at these pressures depends on the
value assumed for the source line width.  The best fit to the static cell data
were obtained for a source Doppler width with a temperature of 600 K.  This
compares favorably with the value of 561 K for the lower temperature part of the
Boltzmann  plot for the line strengths in the narrow-line lamp (Fig. 20).  Meinel
(1975) has suggested that this low temperature part of the Boltzmann plot should
give a measure of the translational temperature of the lamp, which, in turn,
determines the Doppler width of the emitted lines.  This agreement may be
fortuitous,  because the "extra light" phenomena should also affect the apparent
lamp line  width.
                                        111-61

-------
                                         TABLE III-L

                           Static Cell Calibration Data (NO in N2)
Cylinder
Concen-
tration
(ppm)
93.3
93.3
93.3
93.3
93.3
93.3
93.3
470
470
470
470
470
470

Total
Pressure
(atm)
1.315
1.000
.751
.500
.474
.250
.125
1.001
.751
.503
.249
.125
.0627

Optical
Depth
(cm- 2)
5.679-1016
4.317-1016
3. 240-10^
2.159-10
2.044-10
1.079-1016
5.405-1015
2.176-1017
1.633-1017
1.093-1017
5.426-1016
2.721-1016
1.363-1016
1st
Bandhead
Trans .
Meas.
.896
.900
.912
.917
.918
.934
.956
.627
.646
.674
.738
.816
.887
1st
Bandhead
Trans .
Pred.
.890
.900
.909
.920
.921
.939
.959
.625
.633
.666
.734
.812
.882
Error
in Pred.
NO Cone.
(%)f
-6.5
-0.2
-3.2
+3.1
+4.4
+9.2
+5.7
-0.7
-4.5
-2.9
-1.5
-2,4
-4.2
2nd
Bandhead
Trans .
Meas.
.824
.843
.864
.879
.880
.906
.938
.465
.513
.568
.668
.762
.846
2nd
Bandhead
Trans .
Pred.
.821
.842
.859
.879
.881
.909
.938
.469
.498
.555
.651
.748
.835
Error
in Pred
NO Cone
(%)f
-1.9
-0.8
-3.5
-0.1
+0.9
+3.1
+1.3
+1.2
-4.6
-4.2
-6.2
-6.8
-7.5
These errors are based on more significant figures than shown in this table.
sion in Section III.C.4.a for definition  of  error.
See discus-
                                            111-62

-------
     Ill.C.4. b  £lowing_ Gas_ ]le£t£r_(FGH)_Op_ticaJL_M£asurement£

     Calibration tests were performed with the flowing gas heater for NO diluted
in pure N2 and pure Ar at a total pressure of 1 atm (101 kPa) and over a tempera-
ture range from 295K to 825K.  All of these absorption spectra were obtained in
low resolution (FWHM = .146 nm = 1.46 &) , and transmission data were reduced for
the first bandhead, located at about 226.8 nm and the second bandhead, located
at about 226.15 nm.  A comparison of the computer model prediction versus measured
transmission  is shown in Table III-M.   The values from the computer model were
based on an NO concentration which was  the average of the measured value  (chemi-
luminescent analyzer) and the value computed from flow calculations for the
critical orifices.  The ratio of the measured NO concentration to that preducted
by the  flow system was ^ 0.96, which was less than unity because of diffusion of
purge gas into the main stream and, possibly, calibration errors.  The actual
temperature and NO concentration profiles were approximated as two or three zones
of constant temperature for computer predicted transmissions.  The data were
reduced assuming Lorentz broadening, that is a1 = CP/T.  For comparison with the
data reduction procedure used for the  flat flame burner, the Weisskopf dependence
(a* = KP/T  '  ) could have been employed for the FGH.  At room temperature the
Weisskopf theory would give the same result as the Lorentz theory, but, at the
highest temperatures in the FGH, the Weisskopf theory would systematically reduce
the predicted transmissions as shown for Run 43 in Table III-M.  At these tem-
peratures the predicted absorptance  (-In T) is increased about 11 percent, so
that the numbers in column "Error in Pred. NO Cone." would be reduced by about
11 percent.   The overall errors would  probably be slightly reduced by this pro-
cedure .

     III.C.4.C  Flat Flame Burner  (rU/O^/Ar/NO) Optical Measurements
      Optical  calibration for  NO absorption was  performed  for  H2/02/Ar/NO  flames  at
 1  atm (101  kPa)  over  a  temperature  range  from 1000K to  1860K.   Data were  obtained
 independently for  the continuum lamp  and  the  narrow-line  lamp.

      The  continuum lamp data  were used  principally  to determine the line  widths  in
 the  flames, but  the transmission information  was  also available,  and  since  this
 high resolution  technique was used  on some of the CH^/N /O  /NO  flames of  Task  III,
 data were reduced  for the H2/02/Ar/NO flames  to determine its applicability.   Trans-
 mission data  for three  flames at 1000K, 1360K and 1610K are compared  with computer
 model predicted  transmissions in Table  III-N.  These were reduced based on  NO
 centerline  levels  computed from flow  calculations for the critical orifices,
 which were  checked in cold flow, and  profile  data as shown  in Fig. 16.  Two or
 three zones of constant temperature were  assumed.


     The  narrow-line  lamp  data  were obtained  for  four different flame temperatures
with at least two  MO  concentrations at each temperature.  The computed and  actual
transmissions for  the two  bandheads observed  in the  low resolution spectra  are
                                       111-63

-------
                                          TABLE III-M

                          Flowing Gas Heater (FGH) Optical Measurements

                                           1st       1st   Error in   2nd       2nd     Error  in
Run       Temp        NO Cone.   Diluent Bandhead Bandhead Pred. NO Bandhead Bandhead  Pred.  NO
Number (Centerline) (Centerline)   Gas    Trans.   Trans.   Cone.    Trans.   Trans.    Cone.
           (K)       (ppmV)               Meas.    Pred.    (%)f     Meas.    Pred.     (%)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
43*
295.8
295.8
295.8
295.8
4°3.
453.
524.
452.
825.
788.
768.
793.
756.
738.
756
287
112
108
280
112
293
111
280
110
287
284
109
430
521
430
Ar
Ar
N2
N2
Ar
Ar
N2
N2
Ar
Ar
N2
N2
N2
Ar
NO
.735
.882
.904
.779
.926
.793
.945
.823
.962
.891
.907
.962
.856
.791
.856
.752
.895
.912
.790
.930
.815
.944
.843
.961
.896
.908
.965
.862
.809
.847
+7.9
+13.3
+9.1
+6.2
+6.4
+13.3
-2.6
+14.4
-2.6
+5.0
+1.9
+11 . 8
+5.2
+10.7
- 6.8
.609
.818
.848
.661
.899
.726
.920
.764
.947
.854
.869
.949
.805
.733
.805
.643
.841
.861
.684
.903
.750
.920
.783
.946
.859
.873
.951
.811
.747
.794
+12.3
+16.3
+9.9
+9.2
+4.7
+11.4
+0.4
+10.1
-0.6
+3.5
+3.1
+4.9
+3.6
+6.2
-6.1
-1- These errors are based on more significant figures than shown in this table. See discus-
  sion in Section III.C.4.a for definition of error.


§Test case for a'determined from Weisskopf theory.  See text.
                                              111-64

-------
                                                         TABLE III-N

                                              CONTINUUM LAMP TRANSMISSIONS FOR
                                                  H2/02/Ar/NO FLAT FLAMES
l_n
Spectral
Lines


P22(15.5)+Q12(15.5)
Q22(8.5)+R12(8.5)
+P12(26.5)
P22(16.5)+Q12(16.5)
Q22(9.5)+R12(9.5)
R22(5.5)
P22(17.5)+Q12(17.5)
Q22(10.5)+R12(10.5)
AVG. ERROR IN
1000K
Flame
Meas. Computer
Model
(a'=1.10)
.643 .628
.597 .599
.607 .634
.620 .598
.879 .886
.666 .647
.554 .586
+1.2
1360K 1610K
Flame Flame
Meas. Computer Meas.
Model
(a'=0.8)
.694 .702 .751
.702 .709 .744
.690 .688 .738
.695 .702 .754
.920 .924 .940
.688 .700 .748
.672 .705 .751
+4.7
Computer
Model
(a'=0.8)
.759
.760
.757
.764
.941
.761
.753
+4.9
         PREDICTING
         NO FROM MODEL  (%)

       ACTUAL NO
       CONCENTRATION
         (PPMV)
                          t
1466
1690
1867
       See discussion  in  Section  III.C.4.a  for definition of error,

-------
shown in Table III-O.  The computed transmissions were based on a centerline value
which was the average of calculated levels for the critical orifices and cherai-
luminescent measurements (corrected for Ar response), and profile data as shown
in Fig. 16.  Two or three zones of constant temperature were assumed.  The a' values
used to generate the computer spectra were taken from the solid line in Fig. 35.
An estimate of the error in predicted transmission due to the uncertainty in the
a' values is also shown in Table III-O for the highest temperature flame.  The
uncertainty in a' of 0.6 + 0.2 results in a variation of predicted NO of + 9.7
percent.


     The overall agreement between predicted and measured values was within - 16
percent for the flame data,  which was slightly greater than the original goal of
- 10%,  but was reasonable given the experimental uncertainties and relative to the
previously reported discrepancies.  It should be noted that the overall errors
result  from the summation of errors in the model, scatter in the experimental
spectra, uncertainties in the broadening parameter a', uncertainties in the flame
profiles for temperature and NO, and errors in the gas blending procedure.
                                        111-66

-------
                                                                        TABLE III-O

Temp
(K)
1000
1000
1360
1360
1610
1610
1610
1870
1870
§1870
Cone.
(Centerline)
(ppmV)
653
1027
999
1194
1092
1575
1988
1231
2324
2324
                                                                FLAT FLAME BURNER RESULTS
                                                                    (H2/02/Ar/NO FLAMF.S)

                                                     1st          1st          Error In
                                                     Bandhead     Bandhead     Pred. NO
                                         a'           Trans.        Trans.        Cone.
                           Run*     (Centerline)     Meas.         Pred.
                            2           1.14          .824          .811        -8.2
                            1           1.14          .743          .720       -10.6
                            3           0.80          .822          .835       + 8.0
                            6           0.80          .790          .809       +10.1
                            4           0.67          .852          .864       + 8.7
                            5           0.67          .793          .811       + 9.7
                           11           0.67          .740          .768       +12.3
                            7           0.60          .866          .889       +18.2
                            9           0.60          .769          .802       +16.0
                            9           0.40          .769          .781       + 6.2
2nd
Bandhead
Trans.
Meas.
.790
.690
.777
.729
.807
.734
.672
.824
.718
.718
2nd
Bandhead
Trans.
Pred.
.750
.635
.776
.738
.811
.741
.687
.842
.726
.702
Error In
Pred. NO
Cone .
(%)f
-22.0
-22.3
- 0.5
+ 3.9
+ 2.3
+ 3.1
+ 5.5
+11.2
+ 3.3
- 6.4

Avg.
Error
(%)t
-15.1
-16.4
+ 3.6
+ 7.0
+ 5.5
+ 6.4
+ 8.9
+14.7
+ 9.6
- 0.1
tsee discussion in Section III.C.4a for definition of error.

§Test case for sensitivity to a'.  See text.

-------
                                    IV.  DISCUSSION
                                   A.  Introduction

     The computer model that was developed by W. K. McGregor, M. Davis, J. D. Few and
their colleagues at Arnold Research Organization (ARO) was one of the starting points
of this study.  Initially, it was thought that the model rested on a sound theoretical
basis and was supported by strong experimental evidence.  However, experimental data
obtained with the static cell, i.e., under the most ideal conditions, were not in
agreement with the predictions of the model.  A thorough examination of the program
for errors in translation onto the UTRC UNIVAC 1110 computer revealed no such errors.
Additional verification of proper translation was obtained when the results of test
computations made at both UTRC and ARO were in agreement.  An intense review of gas
standards, mixing procedure, optical and electronic instrumentation did not yield the
cause of the disagreement.  Consequently, the theoretical basis of the model was studied
and found deficient.  The errors that were discovered are reported in Appendix B.
These errors appear in reports published since 1973; however, a precise knowledge of
the various forms of the model from 1973 through 1977 is not known.   Suggested refine-
ments to the model delivered to UTRC are also noted in Appendix B.  A new model was
developed on the theory presented in Section III of this report.  A description of
the new model is given in Appendix D.  A major subroutine entitled NO-Spect (Appendix
D) was also provided to ARO in July 1978.  This subroutine can be used to interpret
only resonant lamp data.

                          B.  Comments on ARO AEDC TMR-79-P7

     As part of this study, measurements were made on the UTRC calibration devices by
ARO personnel using a capillary discharge lamp.   The results of those measurements are
contained in an internal ARO Report (AEDC TMR-79-P7) by Few ,  McGregor,  and Keefer
(1979).  This report will be published externally at a later date.

     In order to prevent further confusion in the literature stemming from the errors
contained in the reports listed in Appendix B and problems contained in AEDC TMR-79-P7,
it seemed necessary and was requested by the FAA that the content of this latest    :t
report be discussed here.  That report has four major sections each of which will be
considered below.

IV.B.I.  TMR Introduction

     The last part of this section should be expanded to include  a statement  that the
agreement of the optical measurements with the calculated input of NO concentration  in
conjunction with the probe profiles are  generally within the uncertainties of the probe
and optical measurements.  As written it could be inferred that the uncertainties rest
only in the probe measurements.  Such an interpretation would not be accurate as will
be indicated later  in this review.
                                        IV-1

-------
IV.B.2  TMR Review of Model

     In subsection A which is on the spectroscopic theory, it is stated that the
Hbnl-London factors are those of Earls as previously defined in a report by Davis,
McGregor, and Few (AEDC-TR-76-12, February 1976).  Unfortunately some of the Honl-
London factors included in that report are in error.  In subsection B on model
parameters, the authors state that the oscillator strength value of 4.09 ± 0.1 x
ID"4 Hasson et al) appears to be the most reliable.  The author's judgment is neither
in agreement with Huber and Herzberg (1979) who prefer 3.8 x 10"4 nor with 3.7 x 10~
determined by UTRC.  With regard to source temperature, it should be remembered
that 950 ± 25 K is a factor of 3 higher than that previously reported (e.g. McGregor,
Few. Litton (1973), Few Bryson and McGregor (1976)).  Moreover, the broadening
parameters reported are a function of both the oscillator strength that was selected
from the literature and the source temperature, and, hence, are inferred and not
directly determined.
 IV.B.3  TMR Optical Results

      In the description of the calibration facility, it is incorrectly stated that the
 majority of the  sampling measurements on the flowing gas heater weremadewith the mass
 spectrometer.  In  fact, the bulk of these measurements was made with the chemilumine-
 scent analyzer.  It is also incorrectly stated that the buffer flame of the flat flame
 burner was lean  burning H2/02/Ar.  The buffer flame was actually a lean Clfy/^/Ar
 flame.  Figures  5  and 6 give respectively concentration and temperature profiles over
 the  flowing gas  heater.  In these figures, the uncertainty is listed as unknown.
 These uncertainties are given in Figures 9 and 10 in the main body of the Task I Report.
 Similarly, Figures 7 and 8 of the ARO report give concentration profiles with "unknown"
 uncertainties. See Figures 42 and 16 of the Task I Report.  Also, in Figure 11 of the
 ARO  report, the  40% uncertainty refers only to the radiation correction factor and is
 not  the uncertainty of the temperature measurement itself.  It is not clear why, as
 in the Introduction, the implication is given that the uncertainties in the experimen-
 tal  data reside  only in probe, thermocouple, and calibration device performance.  In-
 deed, this is an incomplete assessment of the uncertainties.  A complete assessment
 of the errors should also include variations in lamp intensity, drift in system elec-
 tronics, trigger and grating scan uncertainties and their influence on the signal
 averaging process  used by ARO.  These experimental uncertainties were  readily identi-
 fiable during the  ARO measurements made at UTRC.

      With regard to data treatment, the new model developed by ARO is briefly described.
 This  new model does not employ a Beer's Law zonal treatment of temperature and con-
 centration inhomogeneities encountered in combustion systems.  Instead, the new model
 keeps a detailed knowledge of the emission line shape from zone to zone.  Figure 17
 illustrates in an  exaggerated manner the importance of a problem which can occur when
 the  absorber line  is narrower than the source line.  Such a situation, it is stated,
 would be encountered for a jet engine exhaust under altitude conditions.  This state-
 ment  is extremely  vague and in the context of this study is misleading.  No information
 is given on what altitude such a condition may occur.  Moreover, no data were obtained
                                          IV-2

-------
in this study that required consideration of this phenomena.  In addition, if the ICAO
standard atmosphere is used to provide temperature and pressure as a function of alti-
tude and if 600 K is assumed to be a typical static temperature of a jet exhaust, then
the absorbing lines at 35,000 feet are still considerably wider than the emission lines.
Even at 65,000 feet, significant transmitted line center "burnout" is not expected.

     Equation (17) [Ac = {(j?n Tmeas/£n Tcal)-l}.  100] that was used to compute the per-
cent error in concentration given in Tables 3,  4, and 5 is not the same expression
used in Task I Report Tables III-L, III-M, and  III-O.  The expression used in Task I
Report was
                               Ac =   l  -      ^      . 100
                                    V     *" Tmeas /

     Using equation  (17),  the root-mean square average departures of the calculated
NO concentration  is  reported in  the TMR as ± 9% for the absorption cell,  ±18% for the
flowing gas heater,  and ±21% for  the  flat flame burner.  This method of summarizing
the errors obscures  the fact that the errors indicated in Tables 4 and 5, which res-
pectively contain data from the  flowing gas heater and flat flame burner are not really
random but systematic.  In fact,  for  the bulk of  the  data reported in those Tables,
the error is positive and, generally, increases with  temperature.  The average error
for all the ARO tests from room  temperature to the highest temperatures was equiv-
alent to an overprediction of NO  using  the optical technique by + 15%, but at the
highest temperature  the overprediction  was + 29%.  This systematic error is most
likely due to deviations  from Lorentz broadening  theory.  This deviation is dis-
cussed in Section III of  Task I  Report.  Moreover, the errors (-15% to +4.8) listed
in Table III for  the absorption  cell  give an indication of the errorsv associated
with the optical measurement system used by ARO.

IV. B. 4  TMR Summary

     With regard  to  the broadening study results, it  is suggested that the broadening
due to HoO is the same as  that of N2 , Ar, and C02-  The basis for this suggestion is
that the broadening  cross  sections for  N2, Ar, and C02 are similar.  This suggestion
cannot be accepted because of the evidence presented  in Figure   of Task I Report.
Furthermore, H20  is  a polar molecule while N2 , Ar, and C02 are not.

     It is restated  in this summary that the ARO  procedure avoids the incorrect assump-
tion of Beer's law which  is reasonable  for this data  where the absorber lines are con-
siderably wider than the  source  lines.  Furthermore,  serious difficulty with Beer's law
would be expected during measurement on turbine engine exhausts at simulated altitudes.
However, there is no evidence presented in this ARO report that supports these state-
ments.  In fact, for all  the measurements made in this study, the Beer's law assump-
tion is valid.  Moreover,  it is  also a  valid assumption for those altitudes in which
the majority of the  jet aircraft  fleets operate.

     Finally, the ARO report concludes  with a statement that a 20% projected uncer-
tainty can be expected by  the use of the ARO UV resonance line absorption technique
based on the results obtained with uncertain temperature and concentration profiles

                                        IV- 3

-------
in the calibration devices.   It must be reiterated that uncertainties also arise from
the performance of the optical systems as indicated by errors in the static cell measure-
ments which were obtained under the most ideal conditions.

         C.  Comparison of Hollow Cathode and Capillary Discharge Performance

     Although these lamps are very different in design, the emission characteristics
are quite similar as opposed to the statement made in TMR-79-P7-  Overall, the trans-
mission characteristics through media containing NO at various temperatures can be
seen to be comparable from the data in Table IV-A.

         D.   Comparison of the UTRC and ARO  Computer  Programs

     Except for input data,  e.g., lamp temperature,broadening coefficients, etc., the
main body of the present ARO computer program appears to be substantially similar to
the version developed by UTRC from the 1977  ARO model (Davis et al (1976a)).  At room
temperature, the predictions of the ARO model agree with those of the UTRC model.
However, the predictions diverge significantly at elevated  temperature due to the
different temperature dependence for the broadening parameter a'.  The ARO model em-
ploys Lorentz theory while the UTRC model employs Weisskopf theory.  The ARO model
will systematically predict more nitric oxide than the UTRC model for a given trans-
mission, pressure, and elevated temperature  distribution.  As stated in Section IV.B.3,
the different broadening dependence is the probable cause for the systematic overpre-
diction of NO by the ARO model at the high temperatures in  the flat flame burner tests
at UTRC.

     Moreover, it should be noted that the data reported in Table III-N on the con-
tinuum lamp transmissions for the flat flames was reduced using a -model which stored
the line shape for each zone.  For a continuum lamp measurement, this procedure is
necessary.  However, for a resonant lamp, such a procedure  was not necessary for this
study.  At typical commercial jet exhaust temperatures and  operating altitudes (H ^
40,000 ft) this procedure is not necessary.   Moreover, even at 65,000 ft, the resonant
line sources will have lines which are narrower than the exhaust absorber lines.

       E.  Comment on Gas Correlation Measurements

     As stated in Appendix A, this instrument was designed  to measure several pollu-
tant molecules emitted from smokestacks, NO  being one of those molecules.  For that
application, this instrument has considerable merit.   However, for measurements in
this study, this instrument in its present configuration was not well suited for
several reasons.   The first was related to the failure of the detector that was used
in the Wright-Patterson measurements.  The active area of the original detector was
circular (1.3 mm dia) while the replacement  has a rectangular area (4 mm x 0.4 mm).
This geometric mismatch is considerable.  The second  was that the intrinsic noise
of the replacement detector was higher than  that of the original detector.  These
two items alone were most likely responsible for a factor of four increase in the
noise equivalent NO.   A third reason was due to the lines chosen for correlation.

                                         IV-4

-------
For temperatures up to 900K, this selection of lines was such to produce a temperature
independent calibration curve.  Above 900K, however, the selection is no longer
optimum; hence, the sensitivity decreases by almost a factor of three at the highest
temperatures of this study.

     The center-line concentrations necessary for adequate signal-noise ratios for
the infrared measurements were typically factors of 2 to 10 greater than those used
in the ultraviolet measurements.  Because of the loss in sensitivity, a side-by-side
comparison data is not possible.
                                         IV-5

-------
                                     TABLE IV-A

                           COMPARISON OF TRANSMISSION DATA
                              ARO LAMP VERSUS UTRC LAMP
                                              TRANSMISSION
                               1st BH
                        ARO             UTRC
                                   ARO
                                          2nd BH
                 UTRC
STATIC CELL
93.3 ppm

470 ppm


.892
-901
.621


.905
.899
.628
.627

.835
.849
.482


.850
.843
.504
.497
FGH
  280,ppm 452 K

  288ppm, 448 K
.817
                 .823
.753
                 .764
FFB
  999 ppm,  1360 K
 1066 ppm,  1360 K      .811
                   (a=1.97-10-4)
                 .822
                 .777
             (a-2.53.10~4)
                                  .747
                              (a=2.74-10-4)
                                        IV-6

-------
                             V.  SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

     Methods for providing known amounts of NO from room temperature to 2000 K were
developed.  At room temperature, a stainless steel, static cell was used. This cell,
which was 18.6 cm long and 2.2 cm in diameter, was leak checked at 1 x 10~6 torr
(1.33 x 10~4 pa) an(j could be pressurized to 115 psia (792 kPa).    Its windows were
ultraviolet grade fused silica.  The cell was attached to a precision mixing apparatus
and used in obtaining the majority of the broadening and oscillator strength informa-
tion presented in this report.  For temperatures up to 850 K, a quartz-bed heat ex-
changer, through which mixtures of NO in N2 and Ar were flowed, served as a calibra-
tion device.  NO decomposition in the bed was not significant  (<10%).  NO concentra-
tions, measured with both uncooled quartz and metallic probes at and near the center-
line, were in close agreement with NO concentrations calculated for a gas mixing
apparatus which employed critical flow orifices.  The NO determinations were made
with both chemiluminescent analysis and mass spectrometry.  For those cases where Ar
was the bulk gas, proper account of viscosity and quenching phenomena was taken in
the calibration of the chemiluminescent analyzer.  Kinetic analysis indicated that
substantial decomposition would not occur in this exchanger up to 1000 K.  Thermal
runaway of the electrical heating elements, however, prevented its use at that tem-
perature.  For temperatures of 1000 K to 2000 K, a lean H2/02/Ar flat flame seeded
with NO was used.  The burner surface was constructed of water-cooled, sintered
copper with two zones:  a main, NO-seeded zone and an unseeded buffer zone.  Measure-
ments made with water-cooled quartz probes indicated downstream conservation of NO
in flames whose stoichiometries were varied from 0.36 to 0.92.  Ar was used as a
bulk gas instead of N~ to preclude the formation of thermal NO.  The data confirm
that water-cooled quartz probes can be used in measuring NO in lean l^/^/Ar flames.
Detailed concentration and temperature distributions were obtained along the optical
path for both high temperature devices.  These distributions had-to be available for
the reduction of the optical data and their comparison with probe results.  The
temperature measurements were made with thermocouples.  For the quartz-bed heat ex-
changer measurements,  uncoated chromel-alumel was used.   In the flame measurements,
Ir/60%Ir-40%Rh wires (76(jm) coated with 10% beryllium oxide and 90% yttrium oxide
were employed.  The purpose for the coating was to minimize catalysis on the wires.
Corrections for radiation losses were applied to the data obtained on the flames.

     Two distinct ultraviolet sources were used in this study.  The first was a
hollow cathode lamp.  A dc discharge in air at low pressure (2 Torr; 266 Pa) pro-
duced emission lines mainly from NO molecules, N£ molecules and ions, and Ar atoms.
The spectral lines used in this study were in the Y(0,0), Y(l,l)  and Y(2,2) bands
(A^E"1" - X^rr) of NO.   The second source was a high pressure Xe lamp which produced
radiation of the continuum type through the above spectral region.
                                         V-l

-------
     A detailed review of the previously developed spectroscopic 'theory and computer
model, which was supplied to these authors at the beginning of this study by ARO,
Inc., revealed several significant errors (Appendix B).   The accuracy of the optical
results published by the originators of that theory and model is, hence, in doubt.
Due to the complex history of the computer model, inconsistencies in calibration data
and the unavailability of the original raw data, it is not possible to comment with
certainty on the accuracy of the optical data existing in the literature.  Where
possible, some reanalysis of the original data will be included in TASK III Report.

     Because of these difficulties, the spectral theory used in the previously
published model was corrected, and the computer model was expanded so that not only
data from resonant line sources can be analyzed but also that from continuum sources
(Appendix D).  Experimental data were obtained at low and elevated temperatures
using these significantly different spectral sources.  A comparison of these data
showed excellent agreement; hence, the validity of the theory and model were estab-
lished.

     In order to use this model, a knowledge of the broadening of NO spectral lines
in foreign gases was necessary.  Data on broadening in Ar, N2, C02, CO and CH^ were
obtained by the direct observation in high resolution of isolated lines using the con-
tinuum source.  If Lorentz theory is assumed, i.e., a'=CP/T, the following values
of C were obtained:  C(Ar) = 1331 atnT1 K; C(N2) = 1725 atm~l K; C(C02) = 1655 atm"1 K;
C(CO) = 1748 atm"1 K; and C(CH-) = 1918 atm"1 K.  If Weisskopf theory is assumed,
i.e., a' = K'P/T1-2, then the same experimental data yield: K' (Ar) = 4154 atm~1K1'2;
K' (N2) = 5383 atm-l-K1-2; K' (C02) = 5165 atm'1^-2; K'(CO) = 5455 atnT^-K1-2; and
K (CH^) = 5986 atm^K1'2.  These data were also reduced to determine the following
collision diameters:  d(Ar) = 1.04 nm; d(N2) = 1.13 nm;  d(C02) = 1.17 nm; d(CO) -
1.15 nm; and d(CH4) = 1.10 nm.  Because of the oxidation of NO to N02 by 02, precise
measurement of the broadening parameter for 02 was not possible.  However, for the
data obtained, it was estimated that the broadening parameter for 02 has a value
which lies between that of Ar and N2.  Data taken on the flames indicated that at
elevated temperature Weisskopf theory seemed to provide a better fit to the data.
If that theory is used and if it is assumed that 02 is as efficient a broadener as
N2,  then the broadening parameter for H20 is 6260 atm~l K^--2.

     Oscillator strengths were determined from data obtained with both radiation
sources.  From the continuum lamp data, the oscillator strengths for the NO Y(0,0)
A2£+ - X2n3/2 band when NO is diluted in N2, C02, CH^, and Ar were 3.57 ± 0.06 x 10~\
3.54 ± 0.004 x 10~4. 3.51 ± 0.02 x 10~4, 3.27 ± 0.06 x 10~4, respectively.  A measure-
             7-4-2
ment of the A £  - X TT]/2 band with N2 as the diluent yielded an oscillator strength
of 3.72 ± 0.23 x 10~^.  This value was chosen for comparison with values in'the liter-
ature because the  TT^/2 state is more heavily populated at room temperature than the
  3/2 state-  The agreement is good but slightly lower that those considered to be
the most reliable.  However, it should be noted that this study is unique since the
oscillator strengths were measured directly from individual lines in high resolution.
                                         V-2

-------
With the use of the broadening data obtained with the continuum lamp,  the oscillator
strengths in the model were adjusted so that transmissions predicted by the model
agreed with the experimental data obtained with the hollow cathode lamp.  The values
for the  "1/2 an^  n3/2 were 3.53 x 10~^ and 3.20 x 10"^ respectively.  These values
were low relative to the continuum values because of the presence of radiation in
the hollow cathode lamp due to species other than NO.  If an estimate  is made of the
effect of this excess radiation, the oscillator strengths for these transitions are
3.76 x 10~^ ( ^1/2) and 3.43 x 10~^ (^3/2) •  The source temperature used in this
and all calculations involving the hollow cathode lamp was 600 K.

     Sufficient measurements were conducted and compared with model predictions of
transmission that the optical system, based on a hollow cathode lamp and associated
spectral model, can be considered calibrated to measure NO.  If accurate temperature
and pressure data are available and if the NO absorption is large relative to the
noise, then measurements with accuracies of at least - 20% are possible.

     Similarly, if a proper model is used, the capillary discharge lamp (see Section
IV.D.) can also be considered calibrated.

     In order to reach this conclusion for the hollow cathode lamp, data were ob-
tained and processed in the following manner.  Two concentrations of NO in N~ (93.3
ppm and 470 ppm, independently certified) were introduced into the static cell at
pressures ranging from 47 Torr (6.3 kPa) to 1000 Torr (133 kPa).  The  first and
second bandhead transmissions of the Y(0,0) transitions were measured  and compared
with model predictions.  The averaged errors in concentration between  predicted and
measured were -0.3% and -2.23% for the first and second bandhead data  sets, respect-
ively.  For the quartz-bed heat exchanger and the flat flame, the temperature and
concentration profiles were divided into zones, and the transmissions  through each
zone were calculated using the average temperature and concentration in each zone.
For the quartz-bed heat exchanger, the averaged errors in concentration for the total
data set based on first and second bandhead transmissions were +7.14%  and +6.79%,
respectively.   Similarly, for the flat flame data, the averaged errors for the data
sets were +7.04% and -2.19%, respectively.  The maximum error encountered for any
single measurements was 22.3%.  Finally, for the high resolution continuum measure-
ments, the averaged error of the set was +3.6% in concentration.  It must be noted
that these errors reflect the errors associated with the optical measurements,  model
predictions, and the temperature and probe concentration measurements.

     Finally,  an empirical calibration of the infrared gas correlation spectrometer
was performed (Appendix A).  Because this instrument was originally designed for stack
monitoring,  i.e.,  low temperatures and high densities,  it was not well-suited for the
measurements of interest here.  The low temperature data indicated that the instru-
ment was 20% more sensitive relative to the calibration previously used in jet com-
bustor measurements.   This variation is attributed to changes in grating alignment.
A dependence of the calibration on broadening gas was observed and determined.   For
temperatures up to 900 K, the calibration, within the scatter of the instrument output,
                                         V-3

-------
remained constant.   Above 900 K,  a significant  decrease  in sensitivity was  observed.
This dependence is  most likely due to  significant  changes  in the  populations  of the
lines selected by the grating assembly.   However,  sufficient data were obtained to
allow measurements  to be made at  high  temperatures if  high NO seeding  of  the  media
is used.
                                       V-4

-------
                                     REFERENCES

Abramowitz, M. and  I. A.  Stegun:  Handbook of  Mathematical  Functions,
Dover, N.Y. (1965).

Anderson, P- W.:  Phys. Rev.,  76, 647  (1949).

Antropov, E. T.,  N. N.  Sobolev and  V.  P.  Cheremisinov:   Opt.  Spectrosc.  16,
115  (1964).

Blackburn, G. F.  and F. R. Caldwell:   J.  Research, NBS-C Engineering and
Instrumentation 66C, 1  (1962).

Bergeman, T. H.,  and R. N. Zare:  Bull. Am. Phys. Soc. ,  17, 149  (1972).

Bethke, G. W. :  J.  Chem.  Phys., _31_,  662  (1959).

Breene, R. G., Jr.:  Rev. Mod.  Phys.,  2_9, 94 (1957)

Brunauer, S., P.  H. Enunett and E. Teller:  J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  60,  309  (1938).

Cann, M. W. p., R. W. Nicholls, W.  F.  J.  Evans, J. L. Kohl, R. Kurucz,
W. H. Parkinson,  and E. M. Reeves:   Appl. Opt., 18, 964  (1979).


CIAP  (Climatic Impact Assessment Program) DOT-TST-75-51,  52 (1975).

COMESA (Committee on Meteorological  Effects of Stratospheric Aircraft) U.K..
Meteorological  Office, Bracknell (1975).

COVOS (Comite d'Etudes  sur les  Consequences des Vols Stratospheriques)  Societe
Meteorologique de France, Boulogne  (1976).

Crutzen, P. J.:  Quart. J. Royal Met.  Soc., 96, 320 (1970).

Crutzen, P- J.:  Ambio, _1, 41  (1972).

Davis, M. G., W.  K. McGregor and J.  D. Few:    Arnold Engineering Development
Center Report AEDC-TR-74-124 (AD-A004105), (1976 a)

Davis, M. G., J.  D. Few and W.  K. McGregor:  Arnold Engineering Development
Center Report AEDC-TR-76-12 (ADA021061),  (1976 b)

Davis, M. G., W.  K. McGregor and J.  D. Few:  J. Quant. Spectrosc. Radiat.
Transfer, 16_, 1109  (1976).

Deezsi,  I:  Acta Phys. _9, 125  (1958).

Dodge, L. G., and J. Dusek:  Private Communication  (1978).
                                        R-l

-------
Dodge, L. G., and J. Dusek:  Appl. Opt. 18_, 419 (1979).

Dodge, L. G., M. F. Zabielski, L. M. Chiappetta and D. J. Seery:  To be
submitted to Env.  Sci.  & Tech.  (1979).

Earls, L. T.:  Phys. Rev., 48,  423 (1935).

Engleman, R. , Jr.;   J.  Quant.  Spectrosc.  Radiat.  Transfer,  9.»  391 (1969)-

Engleman, R., Jr.,  P.  E. Rouse, H. M.  Peek and V.  D.  Baiamonte:  Los
Alamos Scientific Laboratory Report LA-4364,  (1970).

Farmer, A. J. D., V. Hasson and R. W.  Nicholls:  J. Quant.  Spectrosc. Radiat.
Transfer, 12_, 627 (1972).

Federal Register, Vol.  41, No.  181, Part 87 - Control of Air Pollution from
Aircraft and Aircraft Engines, September 16,  1976.

Few,  J.  D.,  R.  J. Bryson, W. K. McGregor, and M. G. Davis, in Proc.  Intl. Conf.
Environmental Sensing and Assessment, Las Vegas, Nev.  (Sept, 1975).

Few,  J.  D.,  R.  J. Bryson, and W. K. McGregor:  Arnold Engineering Development
Center Report AEDC-TR-76-180 (1977).

Fraser,  J. M. and Daniels, F.:  J. Phys. Chem. J52, 215-220 (1958).

Gaydon,  A. G.,  and A. R. Fairbairn:  Proc. Phys. Soc.  (London), A67, 474  (1954)

Hadeishi, T., Y. Agarwall, R. D. McLaughlin, and F. Robben:  Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory Report, LBL No. 5213 (1976).

Hanley, H. J. M.:  J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, 2^ 619 (1973).

Hanson, R. K.:  in Shock Tube and Shock Wave Research. Ed.  B.  Ahlborn, A.
Hertzberg, D. Russell,  p. 432,  Univ. of Washington Press, Seattle (1978).

Hasson, V-, A. J. D. Farmer, R. W. Nicholls and J. Anketell:   J. Phys. B,
Atom. Molec. Phys., _5,  1248 (1972).

Herzberg, G.:  Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure, I. Spectra of
Diatomic Molecules, 2nd Ed., Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York (1939).

Hill, E., and J. H. VanVleck:  Phys. Rev., 32, 250 (1928).

Hindmarsh, W. R., and J. M. Farr:  Prog, in Quant. Electronics, _2,  143 (1972).

Hinze, J. 0.:  Turbulence, McGraw-Hill, London, 1959, p. 76.
                                         R-2

-------
Hirschfelder, J. 0., C. F. Curtiss, and R. B. Bird:  Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, p. 10, John Wiley, New York  (1954).
Huber, K. P., and G. Herzberg:  Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure,
Vol. IV. Constants of Diatomic Molecules, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York
(1979).

Jeunehomme,  M.:   J.  Chem.  Phys.  45,  4433 (1966).

Johnston,  H.  S.:   Science,  173,  517.

Kaskan,  W.  E.  and D.  E.  Hughes:   Combustion  and Flame  20,  381-388  (1973).

Kaufman,  F.  and  J.  R.  Kelso:   J.  Chem.  Phys.  23,  1702-1707 (1955).

Kent,  J.  H.:   Combustion and  Flame 14,  279  (1970).

Kent,  J.  H.:   Private Communication.

Kusch,  H.  J.,  G.  Rondigs and  K.  Wendt:   J. Quant.  Spectrosc.  Radiat.  Transfer,
17_,  53  (1977) .

Lambrey,  M.:   Compt.  Rend.  189.  574  (1929);  190,  261  (1930).

Lambrey,  M.:   Compt.  Rend., Ann.  Phys.  14, 95 (1930).

McCullough,  R.  W.:   "Measurement of  Critical Rate  Constants  for Nitric  Oxide
Decomposition".   HTGL Report  No.  1,  Mechanical  Engineering Department,  Stanford
University,  Stanford,  Calif.  August  1975.

McCullough,  R.  W.,  C.  H.  Kruger  and  R.  K. Hanson:   Comb.  Sci.  Tech. JL5_,  213-223
 (1977).

McGregor,  W.  K.,  J.  D.  Few and C.  D.  Litton:   Arnold Engineering Development
Center Report AEDC-TR-73-182,  AD-771 642 (1973).

McGregor,  W.  K.,  B.  L.  Seiber  and  J.  D.  Few:   in Proc.  Second  Conf. Climatic
Impact  Assessment Program,  Cambridge,  Mass.  (Nov.,  1972).

Meinel,  H.:   Z.  Naturforsch.,  30a, 323  (1975).

Mitchell,  A.  C.  G.  and M.  W.  Zemansky:   Resonance  Radiation  and Excited
Atoms,  Cambridge Univ.  Press  (1971).

Mori,  Y.  and  K.  Ohtake:   Comb. Sci.  Tech. 16, 11-20 (1977).

Mori,  Y.,  K.  Ohtake and T.  Taira:   Proceedings  of  13th Symposium on Engineering
Aspects  of  Magnetohydrodynamics,  VII.3.1 (1973).
                                       R-3

-------
Mulliken, R. S. and A. Christy:  Phys. Rev., 38, 87 (1931).

Naude, S. M.:  Phys. Rev. 36, 333 (1930).

NAS  (National Academy of Science), "Environmental Impact of Stratospheric
Flight", Climatic Impact Committee (1975).

Oliver, R. C., E. Baver and Wasylkiwskyj:  DOT-FAA Rpt. FAA-AEE-78-24.

Oliver, R. C., E. Baver, H. Hidalgo,  K. A. Gardner and Wasylkiwskyj:
DOT-FAA Rpt. FAA-EQ-77-3 (1977).

Pearse, R. W. B. and A. G. Gaydon:  The Identification of Molecular Spectra,
Chapman and Hall, London (1965).

Pery-Thorne, A. and F. P. Banfield:   J. Phys. B.: Atom. Molec. Phys.,
3, 1011 (1970).

Planet, W.  G.,  G.  L.  Tettemer,  and J.  S.  Knoll:   J. Quant.  Spectrosc. Radiat.
Transfer,  _20, 547  (1978).

Reid,  R. C. and T. K. Sherwood:  The Properties of Gases and Liquids, McGraw-
Hill,  Inc. 2nd Edition, 1966; p. 420-1, 483-4.

Reif,  F.:  Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, P. 469, McGraw-Hill,
New York (1964).

Schwarz, F. P- and H. Okabe:   Anal.  Chem., 47,  703 (1975).

Seery, D. J.:  Private Communication 1978.

Seery, D. J., M. Zabielski and G. L.  Dodge:  E.P.A. Report to be published,
1979.

Shapiro, A. H.:  The Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid
Flow, Volume 1, p. 84, Ronald Press  Company, New York 1953.

Shelef, M. and J.  T. Kummer:   "The Behaviour of Nitric Oxide in Heterogenous
Catalytic Reactions" presented in Symposium on Important Chemical Reactions
in Air Pollution Control, Part II.   62nd Annual Meeting of AIChE, Washington,
D.C., November 16-20, 1969.

Spindler,  R. J., Jr., L. Isaacson and T. Wentink, Jr.:  J. Quant. Spectrosc.
Radiat. Transfer,  K), 621 (1970).

Svehla, R. A.:  "Estimated Viscoscities and Thermal Conductivites of Gases at
High Temperatures".   NASA-TRR-132, 1962.

-------
Sulzmann,  K.  G.  P., G. E. Parks and S. S. Penner:   J. Quant. Spectrosc. Radiat.
Transfer,  16, 97 (1976).

Tajime,  T.,  T. Saheki and K. Ito:  Appl. Opt. 17_,  1290 (1978).

Tatum, J.  B.:  Astrophys. J. Suppl. 14, 21 (1967).

Thorne, A. P.:  Spectrophysics, John Wiley & Sons, New York  (1974).

Thorson, W.  R. and R. M.  Badger:  J. Chem. Phys., 27, 609  (1957).

Townes, C. H. and Schawlow:  Microwave Spectroscopy, p. 368, Me Graw Hill,
New York  (1955)  .

Weber, D.  and S. S. Penner:  J. Chem. Phys., _26, 860 (1957).

Winter, E. R. S.:  J. Catalysis, _22, 158-170 (1971).

Wise, H. and M.  F. Freeh:  J.  Chem. Phys. _2J), 22-24  (1952).

Yuan, E. L., J.  I. Slaughter, W. E. Koerner and F. Daniels:  J. Phys. Chem.
_63_, 952-956  (1959) .

Zeldovitch,  Ya.  B., P. Ya. Sadovnikov, and D. A. Frank-Kamenetskii:  Oxidation
of Nitrogen in Combustion"  (Transl. by M. Shelef)  Academy  of Sciences of USSR,
Institute of Chemical Physics, Moscow-Leningrad (1947).
                                         R-5

-------
                                    APPENDIX A
                           MEASURING NO IN AIRCRAFT JET
                        EXHAUSTS BY GAS-FILTER CORRELATION
                                TECHNIQUES, TASK I.
                                 David A. Gryvnak
                        Ford Aerospace and Communications Corp,
                        Aeronutronic Division
                        Ford Road
                        Newport Beach, California  92663
                                   November 1978*
                        Submitted to:
                        United Technologies Research Center P.O. 82126

                        FINAL REPORT TASK I
*Revised Version Received 4/12/79

-------
INTRODUCTION AND  SUMMARY






     As a result  of  tests  performed at  Wright Patterson Air Force Base^ '  the



EPA Smokestack  Instrument     was  requested to be used on additional jet exhaust



tests under controlled  conditions.   Tests  were performed using a flat flame



burner, flowing gas  heater and  in the future,  will  be made on a jet burner



and a modified  combustor can  from a Pratt  and Whitney FT12 combustor.   This



phase of the tests deals with the calibration procedures used for the flat



flame burner and  flowing gas  heater conducted at United Technology Research



Center (UTRC).







     The EPA Instrument  is a  laboratory instrument   designed  to detect  S02,  CO,



HCL, HF or NO contaminants being  emitted from a smokestack.   The details of the


                                (1 2)
instruments are well documented   '   and are  not repeated here.   The  instrument



uses the principle of gas  correlation to detect small amounts of contaminant



gases and reduce  or  eliminate -the effect of other gases such  as H.O,  C02 etc.



For this series of tests it is being used  to  detect  NO in the exhaust aircraft



jet engines for temperatures  up to approximately 2000K.








     Three different types of tests were performed.   Static cell tests  were



performed using a sample cell to  contain the  gas at  room temperature.   At  UTRC



a glass cell 10 cm long  with  NaCl windows  was  filled with NO  premixed with either



Ar or N2.   At Ford two  cells  were used,  each  with a  20 cm path length.  One cell



with A1203 window, the  other  a glass cell  with A1203 windows.  The samples  were



NO premixed with  N2.  The  Flowing Gas Heater  tests at UTRC consisted  of flowing a



carrier gas of  either N2 or Ar through  a heater unit into a sample area that is



17 by 9.2 cm.  Known amounts  of NO were seeded into  the carrier gas at  tempera-



tures up to 800K.  Buffer  gases surrounded and contained the  sample gases  and



flooded the remainder of the  sample area.  NaCl windows allowed the light  beam






                                     A-l

-------
to traverse the sample area while confining the gases.  The Flat Flame  Burner




tests at UTRC consisted of flowing an argon carrier gas containing H2 and




02-  The H2 + 02 was burned at the proper ratio and flow rates to create




the desired temperatures from 1000K up to 1600K.  The argon was seeded  with




known amounts of NO.  The same buffering system and external housing used




for the flowing gas heater were used for the flat flame burner.









     Because of the versatility designed into the EPA instrument, it is not




optimized for any particular gas contaminant, physical  pathlength,  particular




environment or temperature.  It was designed to be relatively insensitive  to




NO sample temperature changes up to 900K.  This was achieved by selecting  a




spectral bandpass that contains NO absorption lines that will increase  in




strength and some that will decrease as the sample temperature increases.  This




results in the sum of the strengths of the lines remaining relatively constant




for the temperature range from 300 to 900K.  Above 900K the response of the




instrument decreases with increasing temperature.  The present tests were




performed to calibrate the instrument and to determine if an empirical  relation-




ship could be formulated to account for the temperature effect.  A curve has




been determined to relate the original calibration to the higher temperatures.




The instrument was found to be more responsive by 15 to 207« to samples  pressurized




with N2 under static conditions at room temperature than when used at Wright




Patterson Air Force Base.  This is due primarily to a shift in the bandpasses




of the grating box.  The instrument was also found to be more responsive to




samples  diluted    with Ar than to samples pressurized with N2.









     Differences of as much as 287,, occurs  for room temperature samples  between




static cell tests and flowing gas heater tests.  These differences are"most"




]Ikely'due to improper purge flow.
                                     A-2

-------
INSTRUMENT REFURBISHING




     The instrument was received  from EPA with no  apparent  damage  in  shipment.




A few mirrors that were broken, previous to  shipment, were  replaced with




mirrors of similar optical quality.  The instrument was  originally designed




to be used on a smokestack, with  an across-stack path using a retro-reflector




to doublepass the sample area.  With the type of test conducted  at United




Technology Research Center we could not doublepass the beam because of the




physical dimensions of the apparatus involved.  Consequently, a  source section




was built to be placed on the opposite side  of the sample section  to  direct




the beam through the  sample area  to the main instrument.  This is  similar to




the technique used at Wright Patterson Air Force Base when  the same instrument




was used for NO measurements on a simulated  jet aircraft engine.   The source




optics consisted of some focusing mirrors and an electronic reference that




was actuated by the 435 Hz chopper that also chopped the light beam from a.




Nernst source.  The main instrument was checked for optical alignment.  The




transfer optics had to be adjusted when the  grating box  was placed into the




instrument.  The mask on the transfer optics was removed in order  to  increase




the throughput of the instrument.








     The grating box  is the same  one used for the  Air Force Wright Patterson




experiment.  The grating box passes three spectral intervals where NO absorption




lines occur.  Figure  1 shows three spectral  curves over  the spectral  interval




of interest.  The upper panel shows the water vapor absorption by  laboratory




air at room temperature.  The middle panel shows the spectral bandpasses of the




grating box, and the  third panel  shows the absorption by NO in those  bandpasses.




As can be seen by the middle panel, the spectral bandpasses mask out  the strongly




absorbing H20 lines.  In the spectral interval between 1925 and  1940  cm~*  the
                                    A-3

-------
   0.5-
   05'-
co
o:
    1.0'-
   0.5 r
    0
	I.
Figure 1.
          1950
                                            GRID
                                           .I


N
i
w
i
A
i*
!ii
III
1!
f]

1
(|
1

/



A
1
\\

A

1
1
''GRID
i
                                                     NO a  mo

                                     1900
              WAVENUMBER   (cm-l)
Spectral transmittance cxirves  over the spectral interval passed
by the NO grid assembly.   The  upper panel  shows the H20 absorption
by laboratory air  at room temperature.  The middle panel shows the
spectral bandpasses of the grid.  The lower panel shows the absorp-
by NO in the bandpasses of the grid.  The dotted lines indicate the
bandpass shift.
                                 A-4

-------
the NO absorption lines increase in strength as  the  temperature  increases.




In the spectral interval between 1895 and 1920 cm"   the  NO absorption lines




decrease in strength as the temperature  increases.   The  total  absorption




tends to remain constant as the temperature changes  in the range from 300 to




900K. The grating box was placed into the instrument and optically checked.
     The InSb detector was installed, however,  the  dewar  had leaked causing




the window of the detector to  frost    with water  condensation.   Our  detector



department attempted to reevacuate  the  dewar.   The  pins had  epoxy  deposited




around them to stop the leak that was created by  the  cracks  in  the glass  near




the pins.  The dewar was tubulated, evacuated and pumped  for about four days,




then the tubulation was sealed.  The dewar  subsequently was  tested and found




to hold liquid nitrogen for four hours.  However, because the dewar was filled




with liguid N2 to the top  the epoxy cracked and allowed the dewar to




leak again.
      A replacement detector, that was not  optically  suited  for  the  instrument




because of its element size, was  installed  in  the  instrument.  The area  of  the




element of this detector is 4 mm   x 0.4mm  , whereas  the area  of the original




detector element was 1.3 mm in diameter.   The original preamps  of the instrument




were found to be defective in that two  of  the operational amplifiers had to  be




replaced.  A new preamp was used with the  replacement  detector.  The rest  of the




electronics were found to be functioning very well.









     Because of the late arrival of the instrument and the  length of time  that




it took to resolve the electronic and detector  problems, limited time was
                                      A-5

-------
available to check out the instrument and make the needed repairs.   The grating


box was installed in the instrument and the transmittance of  the  correlation


cell was checked.  This was done by comparing the carrier signal  when the


correlation cell was not in the beam to the carrier  signal when the  correla-


t ion cell was in the beam.  We found that the transmittance of the correlation


cell was 577», which was the same as when used on the Wright Patterson Air Force


tests.  This test seemed to be a good indicator that the correlation cell and


the grating box were in good  spectral alignment and  that the  correlation cell


had probably not changed its  spectral characteristics.




     A calibration test was then performed to check  the previous  calibration.


The calibration curve used at Wright Patterson is shown in Figure 2.  A sample


of 1000 ppm in a 20 cm sample cell produced a V of  68 x 10'^.  From the pre-

                                                                             f\
vious calibration this V would represent an absorber thickness of 2.1 x 10~*

                                                                f\
atm cm q—p  .  Whereas the sample in the sample cell was 1.8 x  10"^ atm cmg^p •


The instrument was indicating approximately 15% higher than the sample in the


sample cell.   The short term noise-equivalent V1  was 4 x 10" ,  which gave a


noise-equivalent u of 1.1 x 10" ^ atm cm__.
                                     A-6

-------
    0.1
            NO Calibration
   0.01
  0.001
                                 -I-  296K
                                 o  581K
                                 D  873K
                                    880K
0.0001
     0.0001
0.001              0.01

 u     Absorber Thickness (atm cm
                                       0.1
          Figure 2.
Calibration curve for NO used at Wright Patterson
Air Force Base, instrument response V' vs absorber
thickness u.

-------
TEST AT UTRC



     The instrument arrived at UTRC in Connecticut in very  good  shape,  with




no damage during shipment.  The optics were set up, and mirrors  had  to  be




cut to accommodate some of the thermocouple connectors that were sticking out




of the chimney.








     Figure 3. shows, an optical diagram of the equipment.   Sodium  chloride




windows were used on the  flat flame burner, and an image of the  Nernst  was




formed in the  center of the flat flame burner.  Mirror M5 then focused  the




image on to mirror XI of  the EPA Instrument.  A glass cell  with  sodium




chloride windows could be  Inserted on the source side of the flat flame




burner in order to test the instrument under  static sample  conditions.  A




burner with a  sintered copper top produced a  flat flame by  burning H2 + 02




in an Ar carrier.  The flat flame burner was replaced with a flowing gas




heater wherein hot gases  as high as 900K could be introduced into  the




infrared monitoring beam.








     Tests using the static cell were done by first evacuating the cell In




order to record a zero and then filling it with a sample.   Two types of




samples were used, one with argon gas as a broadener and the other with




nitrogen gas as a broadener.  After the sample was introduced into the  cell




and the signal recorded on the recorder, the  cell was evacuated  to record




another zero.  The two zeros on the chart were used to determine the zero




position for the instrument when the gas was  in the sample  cell.  If any




drift had occurred it could be compensated  for by drawing a line through the




two zeros. Typical shifts were less than 1 x  10"^ for V  and 0.3 x 10*3  atm cm



for  u.
                                    A-8

-------
Gas Filter
Correlation
Instrument
f
XI
                                                                                   450 Hz
                                                                                   chopper
                                                     Flat Flame Burner
                                                     Flowing Gas Heater
                     Ml
                              M5
Static
 Cell
 -\'
NaCl
Windows
                                                                                                                M4
                        Nernst
                        Glower
                             Figure 3.  Optical diagram of source optics and sample area.
                                        The static cell was removed when the Flat Flame
                                        Burner or the Flowing Gas Heater was used.

-------
     A similar procedure was used for the flowing gas heater  and  the flat
flame burner.  The flowing gas heater was heated up to the temperature
desired with either Ar or N2 as a carrier gas; the temperature  of the center
of the flowing gas heater sample section was measured and recorded.   A  zero
level was recorded on the chart, then the sample was seeded with  NO  to  a
predetermined amount and the NO concentration at the center of  the sample
area was determined by TJTRC using quartz probe techniques.  The signal  was
recorded on the recorder chart paper and the NO gas was turned  off.   The
instrument then gave another zero level.  The two zeros on either side  of the
signal recorded for the sample were used in order to determine  the zero when
the NO sample was in the sample section.  A similar procedure was used  for
the flat flame burner.  The burner was brought up to temperature,  heating the
argon carrier gas.  Two zero levels were recorded, one before and one after
the carrier gas was seeded with NO.  In the flowing gas heater  and the  static
cell tests both nitrogen and argon were used as a carrier gas.  The  nitrogen
was not used for the flat flame burner for fear of creating other NO or NO,.
                                                                          A
products which would contaminate the sample area.

RESULTS
     The techniques used to reduce the data are very similar  to the  one used
for the tests conducted at Wright Patterson Air Force Base.   The  details of
the data reduction can be found in their report (2).  Only a  brief description
will be given here.


     The signal, V, from the EPA instrument is proportional  to the  NO  absorber
thickness for small samples at constant temperature and concentrations. For
                                  A-10

-------
the samples encountered in these  tests,  u  -  2  x  10'^  atnn cm STP,  the response




of the instrument is linear as  can be  seen from  the calibration curve in Figure




2.  When the sample has temperature  and  concentration gradients,  the sample




path can be considered to be  divided into  small  increments  such that each




incremental path is at a constant temperature  and  concentration.   The absorber




thicknesses for each increment  can be  determined and  because of the  linear




response of the instrument their  sum will  give the total absorber thickness




in the sample path.  In order to  compare the results  of  the instrument with




the actual sample, the temperature and concentration  gradients  must  be known.




A computer program was created  to calculate  the  absorber thicknessess of the




samples at the elevated temperatures.









     To determine the absorber  thickness,  values of temperature and  concentra-




tion were determined from gradient and mole  fraction  gradient curves supplied




by UTRC.  For the flowing gas heater tests,  four temperature profiles were




supplied and shown in Figure  4.   Each  curve  is flat for  a distance out to




approximately 4 or 5 cm from  the  centerline  of the burner.   The actual




centerline temperatures of the  samples are listed  above  the curves for which




they were used.  These profiles were determined within an hour  from the  tests




using the EPA instrument were performed.   The  profiles are  a result  of probe




measurements made by the T7TRC staff  on samples whose  temperatures and con-




centrations were similar to those used when  making the measurements  with the




EPA instrument.  From  the curves in Figure  4, the actual centerline temperatures



of the NO sample can be off as  much  as 10% from  the centerline  temperature



of the curve that was used to determine  the  sample absorber thickness. Figure 5




shows the mole fraction profile for  three  different temperatures. The 300K
                                  A-ll

-------
    800
    750
    700
01
id
s
J_l
a
£
V
H   650
    600
    500
          800K/793K
          25A/24A
        - 723K/703K
          24T/25T
          678K/603K
          22A/23A
          608K/573K
          22T/23T
                                   T
                                    Flowing Gas Heater
                                    Temperature
                                    Profiles
                          46         8        10
                      Distance from Centerline (cm)
    'igure 4.  Temperature Profiles for the Flowing Gas Heater.
              The sample numbers for which the curves were used
              are written below each curve. The temperature  at
              the center of the sample is listed above each  curve.
                     A-12

-------
111
C
l-i
01
4J
c
01
rt

a
rH

o

^-x

If
o
T)

 (U
 
-------
curve was used for the room temperature samples and  the  dotted curve was used


for the elevated temperatures.






     The absorber thickness, u, for a sample of constant temperature and con-


centration can be determined from the UTRC data from



                                                         273
                            u(atm effi) • p(atm) L(cm)  -
where


                            u « Absorber thickness in atm cm


                            p - Absorber pressure in atm - c(ppm)  x  10"


                            c » Absorber concentration in ppm


                            L » Path length in cm


                            6 • Temperature in K                        (2)






However, if the concentration and temperature varys over the sample  path,  then


the absorber thickness for a small incremental path length ^L^  is  given by



                                       27
                            u±

                                       Si
then the total absorber thickness for the path can be found by  summing  over  the


entire path.
                            u - Z Ui - pi ALt                             (4a)
                                i      i        B±
and if the path is divided into equal increments,



                            u - £L 273 x 1CT6  Z
                                   A-14

-------
The concentration can be found  from  the mole  fraction  normalized concentration




profile, M, and the centerline  concentration,  C,  from  the  following expression.








                            Ci - MjC                                (5)






Therefore




                            uc -  LC 273 x 10"6
 where  uc  denotes the calculated absorber thickness.  The values used in the




 calculations  were determined at 0.5 cm increments from Figures 4 and 5. In-




 tegration was done from the center of the sample through 10 cm.  The results




 were doubled  on the assumption that the profile is symmetrical about the




 center line.   Some of the representative curves of previous data indicate that




 this might not be an accurate assumption.  Asymmetry might cause errors as large




 as  8%.








     Because  the calibration curve for the EPA instrument has been determined




 for temperatures in the range of 300K to 900K it is not expected to give




 absolute  results for samples pressurized with Ar or for samples whose tempera-




 tures  are higher than 900K.  In addition it has previously been shown that




 the EPA instrument is giving values that are 157. higher than the original




 calibration curve.   The signal, V, from the EPA Instrument will be used to




 determine a measured equivalent absorber thickness, urn, from the original




 calibration curve.   These measured equivalent absorber thicknesses will be




 compared  to the calculated absorber thicknesses to determine an empirical




 temperature relationship between the instrument response and the calculated




 values for samples diluted with Ar.
                                   A-15

-------
     Table 1 lists the results of the static cell tests.  The  first  column
lists the broadening gas.  The second columns lists the results  of the EPA
instrument.  The third column lists the calculated absorber thickness  and
the fourth column lists the ratios of um/uc.  The noise equivalent u is
approximately 2 x 10"3.  The values obtained for the fifth and sixth samples
in Table 1 are for small samples  diluted    with N2-  The noise  equivalent
u represents a larger percentage error than for the samples for higher
concentrations.  The first three samples listed on Table 1, consequently would
give the more accurate result.  This indicates the EPA instrument is giving
values of about 207, higher which agrees with the results that we  obtained at
Ford prior to the UTRC tests.  The seventh and eighth samples are for  the
calibration test performed at Ford prior to and after the UTRC tests,  res-
pectively.  The last two samples are for argon as a broadener gas and  the
values of um/uc are larger by about 357..  It has been shown (3)  that the
broadening abilities of Ar and fh on CO are different and a similar  effect
on NO might explain the observed effect above.


     The results from the flowing gas heater tests are shown 'in  Table 2.   The
upper portion of the table shows the nitrogen carrier data, the  lower  portion
the argon carrier data.  The left hand column list the test number;  some of
the tests were repeated at a later date and consequently given the same test
number.  The third column lists the temperature at the centerline of the
sample.  The next column lists the centerline temperature of the  curve that
was used in the calculation.  The next column lists the centerline concentra-
tions supplied by UTRC.  The next column lists the measured equivalent absorber
thickness, urn, in atm cmgYp» as determined with the EPA instrument.   Next column
gives the calculated absorber thickness based on the probe curves given by UTRC.
The last column gives the ratio of um/uc.  The lower portion of  the  table lists
the results when argon is used as a carrier gas.
                                   A-16

-------
                        TABLE 1
                  Static Cell Results
Broadener           urn            uc           um/uc
   Gas         (atm cm STP   (atm cm, STP
                   xlO3)         xlO3)
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
24.0
23.5
23.6
4.2
8.5
19.2
19.2
19.2
3.64
7.56
1.25
1.22
1.22
1.15
1.12
   N2              21.2          18.5           1.15
   N2              21.2          18.5           1.15

   Ar              24.5          18.3           1.34
   Ar              24.5          18.3           1.34
                         A-17

-------
                                       TABLE 2




                              Flowing Gas Heater Results
Test
#
20T
21 T
22 T
23 T
24 T
25 T
20 T
20 T
22A
23A
24A
25A
20A
20A
Carrier
Gas
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
Ar
Ar
Ar
Ar
Ar
Ar
600
Measured
296
296
608
573
723
703
296
296
678
603
793
800
295
295
9(K)
Curve


611
611
746
746


667
667
796
796


C
ppm
669
1315
1025
1850
1580
2220
650
668
1018
2047
1585
2200


\mi
atm cm STP
x!03
12.0
24.5
7.5
16.6
8.9
14.6
11.8
12.1
7.4
18.0
8.8
13.9
15.6
15.2
uc
atm cm SYP
xlO3
9.22
18.1
6.69
13.3
8.53
11.9
8.97
8.97
6.11
12.3
8.06
11.2
9.07
9.07
um/uc
1.30
1.35
1.12
1.25
1.04
1.23
1.32
1.35
1.21
1.47
1.09
1.24
1.72*
1.68*
* Window purge was most likely improperly set.
                                         A-18

-------
     The last column indicates a tendency for the ratio to decrease  as  the




temperature increases.  The ratio  for the room temperature  samples  are




much larger than the ratio for the samples at the elevated temperatures. The




calculated results for sample 25T may be reduced if  the temperature  curve,




746K were corrected to the temperature of the centerline of  the  sample,  703K.




It would cause the ratio to decrease coming closer to  the results of  sample




24T.  The values obtained for the nitrogen samples tend to be  lower  than the




samples with argon as the carrier gas in agreement with the  tests on  the




static cell.  The ratio for the argon sample tests also tend to  get  smaller




as the temperature is increased.








     For the flat flame burner tests, similar type calculations  were  carried




out.  However, the temperatures given at the centerline of the sample are not




the true temperatures of gas but the temperature of the thermocouple.  These




temperatures have to be corrected because the thermocouples  are  radiating




thereby decreasing their temperature giving a result that is lower  then the




actual gas temperature.  The temperatures that were  used were  determined from




curves given to us by DTRC.  They are shown in Figure  6.  Four different




temperature profiles are represented.  Listed above  each curve is  the corrected




centerline temperature.








     These curves were determined for similar sample conditions  in  the  flat




flame burner.  However they were obtained prior to May 1978, six months before




the tests with the EPA instrument.  It was assumed that  they would  give a  true




representation of the temperature profile of the sample  conditions  of the  present
tests. The  Centerline  temperatures for the present samples were slightly
                                   A-19

-------
      2000
      1800
      1600
               1820K
      1400
0)
u

OJ
CO
I*
V

£
      1200
1000
       800
       600
       400
       200
                  Flat Flame Burner

                   Temperature Profile
                                       I
                                           I
                             468


                         Distance from Centerline (cm)
                                                   10
12
 Figure
        Temperature profile for the Flat Flame Burner

        The centerline radiation temperature is listed  for each

        curve
                            A-20

-------
different.  However, corrections to these temperature curves were made to get




representative temperature profiles.  We have  interpolated between the curves




for the different samples using a linear interpolation from 2966K to the




calibration curve.  The radiation correction was done in the following matter:




The correction was assumed to  follow the centerline temperature of the sample




raised to some power, probably near the third  power.  The temperature




corrections for the four different curves shown were plotted against the re-




corded centerline temperature  on log-log paper.  The slope of the curve gave




the exponent for the following equation:




                        A-A6  =-^B +^»t(e)n.                          (6)




From the slope of the curve, n was found to be 2.94 and by using the values




that were used to determine the curve, B was found to be 1.24 x 10" .  With




the use of this equation the intermediate temperatures were corrected.  Then




with the use of the computer we determined the values of the integrated u, for




the different samples.  Figure 7 shows the curve determined using probe techniques




prior to May 1978 that was used for the mole fraction profile for the flat flame




burner calculations.









     Table 3 lists the results for the flat flame burner tests.  The second




column in Table 3 shows the uncorrected centerline temperature; the third




column lists the corrected center line temperature.  The fourth column lists




the value of the measured equivalent absorber  thickness as measured by the




EPA instrument, the sixth list the calculated  values and the seventh column




gives the ratio of um/uc.  As  can be seen from Table 3 the data are grouped




into three different temperatures regions.  As the temperature increases,




the tendency for the ratio is  to decrease, similar to the flowing gas heater




results.





                                    A-21

-------
01
c
C
01
u
CO

o
r-l
CO
o
2
T:
01
0)
CO
D

X
      1.0
0.5
      Figure  7.
                 Flat Flame  Burner
                 Mole Fraction Profile
                   I
                                 I
             2          46         8        10         12


                 Distance  from Centerline (cm)


             Mole fraction profile for the Flat Flame  Burner
                          A-22

-------
         TABLE 3




Flat Flame Burner Results
Test
2 OF
2 IF
20FA
21FA
20FB
21FB
21FC
22FA
23FA
26FA
27FA
27FA
22FA
23FA
24FA
25FA
24FA
25FA
25FA
25FB
eoo
Uncorrected
940
935
934
939
919
919
919
1189
1180
1227
1227
1189
1189
1189
1393
1396
1381
1381
1381
1381
e(K)
Corrected
1008
1002
1001
1007
983
983
983
1325
1313
1377
1377
1325
1325
1325
1600
1615
1593
1593
1593
1593
C
pprn
1389
1954
2392
3775
3248
2293
3606
3089
4246
4018
6074
6074
3089
4246
4136
6125
4136
6125
6125
6125
1TTT1
atm cm STP
xlO3
5.8
7.8
7.2
12.0
13.0
8.2
16.0
6.0
8.5
5.8
8.5
7.2
8.4
10.8
5.1
8.5
7.5
10.6
11.8
11.5
uc
3,tffl cm STP
xlO3
6.41
9.08
11.1
17.5
15.4
10.9
17.1
10.7
14.8
13.4
20.2
20.2
10.7
14.7
12.0
17.7
12.1
20.2
20.2
20.2
um/uc
0.905
0.859
0.647
0.688
0.846
0.756
0.937
0.562
0.574
0.434
0.420
0.356
0.787
0.736
0.425
0.480
0.618
0.524
0.584
0.569
           A-23

-------
TESTS AT FORD




     After the tests at UTRC, additional tests were performed at Ford




that were  not done prior  because of tine limitations.  Also tests were




 performed to help explain some  of the  effects  that were observed.









     The grating box was tested by directing a beam of  light through it and




into a grating spectrometer.  The spectral transmittance curve of the grating




box was displayed on a chart recorder.   The spectral bandpasses of the grating




box were compared to the previous spectral bandpasses and found to have been




displaced approximately 2 cm   toward lower wavenumber.  The displacement of




the spectral bandpasses probably resulted in the calibration shift.  It




 c ould have changed the response of the instrument to 1^0; however, during




our tests at TTTRC, when the H2 + Q^ burner was fired creating 1^0, no change




in signal was observed, indicating that the instrument  still had good 1^0




rejection.  Additional calibration tests were performed at the Ford facility




confirming the previous shift of 157. in the calibration curve from the earlier




data.  The spectral transmittance curve of the correlation cell was obtained




and compared to its previous transmittance curve, and no observable difference




was noted.








     There is a noticeable effect when Ar is used as a  carrier or broadening




gas as compared to ^.   We have observed a similar effect    between Ar and




N2 with CO as an absorbing gas.   N2 broadens the CO lines more than Ar.  The




wings of the broadened lines would have more absorption that the wings of




less broadened lines.   Because cylinders of Ar were not available  to check




the effect of the broadening ability of Ar on NO, a test was performed to
                                   A-24

-------
determine the effect of broadening the NO lines with fy-  A sample of NO




at two different pressures near 1 atm was tested.  A 1000 ppm NO  in N2




sample at 0.7 atm in a 20 cm cell was pressurized  with N2 to 1.0 atm and




the signal, V, decreased from 55 x 10~^ to 51.5 x 10"^.  A decrease would




be expected because the wings of the absorption lines contribute  to V  as  a




negative correlation, when the lines are broadened  the wing absorption is




increased, thereby reducing the signal.  Because Ar is not expected to




broaden as much as N2, the wings of the lines will absorb less  for Ar-broadening




thereby increasing the signal.
                                  A-25

-------
CONCLUSIONS




     There is a calibration shift of approximately 15 to 20% higher  from the




calibration used for the Wright Patterson Air Force tests in 1975.   This is




probably due to the spectral shift of the gratin g box bandpasses of 2  cm"




toward lower wavenumber.  The N2-broadened NO lines are broadened more  than the




Ar-broadened NO lines and consequently absorb more in the wings of the  lines.




However more absorption in the wings of the lines will cause a decrease in




the signal, therefore the samples  diluted    by Ar give larger signals than




 samples pressurized by N2.









     The ratio um/uc for the flowing gas heater tests are considerably  higher




than for the static cell tests when Ar is used as the broadening gas.   This is




very clear when the ratio um/uc is compared in Table 1 and Table 2 for  room




temperature samples.  The ratio is 1.34 for the static cell tests and 1.7




for the flowing gas heater.  Personnel at UTRC indicate that the window purge




was improperly set.  The difference is not as great for the samples  pressurized




with N2.  The N2 results are within experimental error.









     Figure 8 shows a plot of the results for samples that are pressurized with




Ar.  The ratio um/uc is plotted against temperature.  The large difference in the




static cell tests and the flowing gas heater results is obvious.  There is a




large amount of scatter in the data.  The noise-equivalent u was approximately




1 x 10   atm cmgTp, 5 to 10% of the observed signal, and accounts for some




of the scatter.   The use of standardized temperature and concentration  profiles




rather than using a profile for each sample could add 5 to 10% to the scatter.




As can be seen from Tables 2 and 3 the centerline temperatures varied by as much
                                  A-26

-------
2.0
i      i      I      r
                                       1     I      I     T
                              um
                              —    vs temperature.

                                 for Ar-broadened  Samples.
                       4
1.0
         •    Flat Flame Burner

        -J-   Flowing Gas Heater

             Static Cell Test at UTRC
         1      I
                              I      I
 Figure 8.
                      looo"2000


                 Temperature (K)


      Plot of um/uc vs Temperature for Ar-broadened samples,
                             A-27

-------
as 107. from the center-line temperatures  of  the  profile  curves used in  the




calculation.  Another  source of error  that  could  add  up to  7 to 10% is




the assumption that the profiles  are symmetrical.   Previous  data supplied




by UTRC indicate  that  the profiles may not  be  symmetrical.









     A smooth curve was drawn  through  the points  in Figure 8.   The curve




shows the decrease in  um/uc as the temperature  increases.  This apparent




change in calibration  was not  observed for  temperatures below 900K in the




previous tests done in 1975.  As  can be  seen in Figure  2 for temperatures




up to 900K, under static conditions, a single  calibration curve could be




used.  The absorption  lines used  in the  detection of  NO tend to account for




temperature changes because some  of the  absorption lines increase in strength and




and some decrease in strength with increasing  temperature.   The total strength




of the sum of the lines would  then tend  to  remain constant over the temperature




range of interest.  However as the temperature  increases above 1000K the




strengths of the  lines all start  to decrease and  the  response of the instru-




ment falls off.   For the subsequent tests on this  contract the calibration




curve should be modified by a  factor determined from  the curve from Figure 8.









     A similar plot for N2-broadened samples is shown in Figure 9.   The




differences between the static cell tests and  the flat  flame burner are




not as great as for the Ar-broadened samples.   In addition the difference




between the static cell tests  and the  flowing  gas heater tests not as




apparent for ^-broadened samples.
                                   A-23

-------
    2.0
             1	1	1	T
 u
>e   i.o
 E
     Figure 9.
                                    um
                                    —  vs   Temperature
                                    uc         r

                                       for N2-broadened  samples
                             f
                      -p   Flowing  Gas  Heater


                       D   Static Cell  Tests at UTOC


                           Static Cell  Test at Ford
                               I
                       I
I
I
               1000                         2000


          Temperature (K)



Plot of um/uc vs Temperature for »9-broadened samples.
                                A-29

-------
REFERENCES:
     (1)   Gryvnak, D.A. and Burch, D.E., "Monitoring NO and CO in
           Aircraft Jet Exhausts by Gas-filter Correlation Technique"
           prepared by Ford Aerospace and Communications Corp for the
           Air Force Aero-Propulsion Laboratory under contract F33615-
           75-C-2038, Air Force report AFAPL-TR-75-101, January 1976.

     (2)   Burch, D. E. and Gryvnak, D.A./'Infrared Gas Filter Corre-
           lation Instrument for Insitu Measurement of Gaseous Polutants,"
           prepared Ford Aerospace and Communications Corp. for EPA under
           contract No. 68-02-0575, EPA Report No.  650/2-74-094,December
           1974.

     (3)   Burch D. E.  and Williams D., "Infrared Absorption by Minor
           Atmospheric Constituents" Sci. Report 1, Contract No. AF
           19(604)-2633 the Ohio State Univ.  Res.  Fn.(1960)
                                   A-30

-------
                                    APPENDIX  B

        COMMENTS ON THE PROBLEMS IN THE PREVIOUSLY REPORTED SPECTRAL MODEL
     The review of the spectroscopic model developed by ARO/AEDC revealed the
following major problems:

1.  There is an error in equation 18 of Ref. B3 (the same error is reflected in
    Refs. B3-B8) relating f^ " to f^ ".which is off by a factor of 4.

2.  There is an error in equation 17 of Ref. B3 (and the other reports) giving
    the ratio N "/NO7 which is off by a factor of about 2.

                                                                  ?       2
3.  In Ref. Bl there was no distinction in population between the  TT^ and  ^3/2
    states (i.e., Hund's case (b) was assumed) although this was partially cor-
    rected in Ref. B3 and the computer program delivered to UTRC, but without the
    correct normalization in the denominator.

4.  An error exists in the equation for the Honl-London factor for Q;Q lines.
    This error can be found in the text of a 1973 report (Bl) , the text of a
    1976 report (Ref. B3), and the computer program delivered to UTRC in 1978.
    ARO personnel have stated that this error was not always present, but they
    are uncertain as to when it first appeared.  The error results in a mis-
    calculation of NO concentration by about 15% when considered alone, and an
    incorrect temperature dependence for the absorption.

5.  An error exists in Eq. 24 of Ref. B3 which relates the measured broadening
    parameter to the collision cross section.  This error does not affect the
    predicted NO values from the model, but does result in a factor of 10 error
    in the collision cross section reported in Ref. B7.

    In addition to the major problems listed above, a number of minor problems
were discovered in the model delivered to UTRC which do not have much numerical
significance, but which should be corrected.

6.  The Q22 (30.5) and R12 (30.5) lines were incorrectly labeled.

7.  The lines Q12 (3.5), R21 (36.5), P12 (31.5) and P12 (34.5) through P12
    (40.5) should be added.

8.  There is an error in the equation for BV in subroutine HONNUM (Honl-London
    factor computation).
                                       B-l

-------
    Finally UTRC has shown that the use of theoretically generated line locations
offers an improvement in the model when compared with the experimental line
locations as given by Deezsi (Ref. B9).  This does not represent an error in the
earlier model, but does represent a considerable improvement,  particularly at
low pressures or elevated temperatures.

References:

Bl  McGregor, W. K., J. D. Few, and C.  D. Litton, Resonance Line Absorption
    Method for Determination of Nitric  Oxide Concentration, Report AEDC-TR-73-
    182, December, 1973.

B2  Davis, M. G., W. K. McGregor, and J. D.  Few, Spectral Simulation of Resonance
    Band Transmission Profiles for Species Concentration Measurements:  NO y-bands
    as an Example, Report AEDC-74-124,  January 1975.

B3  Davis, M. G., W. K. McGregor, J. D. Few,.and H.  N. Classman, Transmission of
    Doppler Broadened Resonance Radiation Through Absorbing Media with Combined
    Doppler and Pressure Broadening (Nitric  Oxide y~Bands as an Example),  Report
    AEDC-TR-76-12, February 1976.

B4  Few, J. D., R. J. Bryson, and W. K. McGregor, Evaluation of Probe Sampling
    Versus Optical in Situ Measurements of Nitric Oxide Concentrations in a Jet
    Engine Combustor Exhaust, Report AEDC-TR-76-180,  January 1977.

B5  Few, J. D., R. J. Bryson, W. K. McGregor, and M.  G. Davis,  Evaluation of
    Probe Sampling Versus an In Situ Optical Technique for Nitric Oxide Concen-
    tration Measurement in Combustion Gas Streams, Proceedings  'of the International
    Conference on Environmental Sensing and  Assessment, Las Vegas,  Nevada, September
    1975.

B6  Few, J. D., W. K. McGregor, and H.  N. Classman,  Ultraviolet Spectral Absorption
    Measurements of Nitric Oxide Concentration in T-56 Combustor Exhaust,  AIAA
    Paper No. 76-109, AIAA 14th Aerospace Sciences Meeting, Washington, DC,
    January 26-28, 1976.

B7  Davis, M. G., W. K. McGregor, and J. D.  Few, J.  Quant. Spectrosc. Radiat.
    Transfer, 16, 1109 (1976).

B8  Few, J. D., W. K. McGregor, and H.  N. Classman,  Resonance Absorption Measure-
    ments of NO Concentration in Combustor Exhaust,  in Experimental Diagnostics
    in Gas Phase Combustion Systems, edited  by B. T.  Zinn, p.  187, published by
    AIAA, 1977.

B9  Deezsi, I., ActaPhysica, 9, 125 (1958).
                                       B-2

-------
                                    APPENDIX C
             COMMENTS ON THE EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUE OF WISE AND FRECH


     Wise and Freeh observed the amount of NO decomposition by measuring the
formation of the assumed products, N2 and 02-  Molecular nitrogen was measured
by trapping the remaining NO in liquid nitrogen and using  'manometric' tech-
niques.  Oxygen was allowed to react according to

                                 NO + NO + 02 ->• 2 N02                   (Ic)

The nitrogen dioxide was measured via optical absorption techniques.  Several
problems with their paper and experimental procedure may be found.  First of
all, no comparison is made between the No and N02 data.  Secondly, no allowance
is made for alternative reactions or their products.  For example, consider the
overall reactions

                                 4NO ->• 2 Nn + 2 N02                     (2c)
                          or
                                 2ND ->- M20 4 1/2 02                     (3c)

for which experimental data must be interpreted differently.  Finally, and quite
importantly, their pressure measurement  of the product N2 appears to be at
best extremely difficult.  Since very low levels of conversion were examined
(usually about 0.5 percent), very small pressures of N2 are expected, typically
about one torr.  In order for their technique to be useful, the nitrogen pres-
sure must be measured accurately in a background of approximately one torr nitric
oxide (vapor pressure at liquid nitrogen temperatures), one torr of oxygen (if
a product), and about 1/4 torr impurity (likely to be nitrogen).  Certainly, a
measurement of one torr nitrogen with these other gases present would not be an
easy task.   If the dominant impurity in the initial NO is N02 rather than N2 or
N-0 (stated purity is 99.93 percent NO), then a measurement of 0.5 percent de-
composition would be in error by (.07 percent) x 2/.5 percent = 28 percent when
the N02 data is interpreted.
                                       C-l

-------
                                     APPENDIX D


               UTRC  SPECTRAL COMPUTER PROGRAM DESCRIPTION AND  LISTING


          D.I.  Program Description  of  NO Absorption  of  Continuum Radiation

D.I.a. Introduction

     Several different versions of the NO spectral model have  been developed.
 All of these are based on the model developed by Davis et al  (1976)a and sup-
 plied to us, with corrections and additions made by us as noted in Appendix B.
 The plot routines are substantially different.  The corrections made to the
 original program developed by Davis et al (1976a) make a significant differ-
 ence in the amount  of NO necessary to produce a given amount  of absorption -
 about a factor of 2 at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.

     The different versions of the NO spectral model may be summarized as
 follows.  The absorption of continuum radiation by a homogeneous,  isothermal
 layer of NO diluted in a foreign gas is modeled by the program (DUSEK*)NO-ABS
 (described in D.I.), in conjunction with the plot routine (DUSEK*)PLOT.
 PLOT5 (detailed in D.IV.) and the data file (DUSEK*)DATA-2. or (DUSEK*)DATAENG.
 The similar problem for absorption of continuum radiation by  multiple zones,
 each of which is homogeneous and isothermal, is treated with  two programs  not
 described here, (PAGE*)NO-ABS. and (PAGE*)PLOT., along with the data file  (PAGE*)
 DATA-2.   The multiple zone includes the proper accounting of the complete line
 profile through the different absorbing layers before convolving the resultant
 with the slit function.   The model describing the absorption  of narrow-line
 radiation is called (DUSEK*) NO-SPECT.   (described in D.II.),  with the same plot
 routine and data files as for (DUSEK*)NO-ABS.

     The program NO-ABS.  predicts  the transmission as a  function of wavelength
of incident  continuum radiation by a known optical depth of nitric oxide at a
given temperature and pressure.  This program  was written  specifically for pre-
dicting  transmission in high resolution  over  a narrow wavelength region.  An
additional program, PLOT.,  convolves this predicted transmission with a  spectro-
meter slit function and displays  the results graphically for  comparison with
experimental spectra.

     The program NO-ABS.  is  composed of  a main program,  four  subroutines, and
a block data file.  The program elements for  the main body and  the block data
are NO-ABS.MAIN and NO-ABS.BLOCK-DATA, respectively.  The  element names  of
the subroutines are FUPPER, FLOWER, HONNUN, AND WFUNC.  Each of these names
is preceded by the file name NO-ABS, as before.  A definition of variables
for each element of NO-ABS. and a listing of the elements are included at the
end of the program description section.
                                       D-l

-------
D.I.b. Main

     The main program is divided into four parts.  A description of the function
of each part follows.
     Part One reads parameters such as the optical depth, temperature, pressure,
broadening information, options for line location, region of interest and a
code that describes the version of the program presently in use.  The options
available for line location include either a theoretical calculation of line
center or the use of experimentally determined line center wavenumbers.  The
experimental values for the line center wavenumbers were obtained from Engleman
et al  (1970).  Theoretical line locations using spectroscopic equations and
constants for NO (Engleman) yield predicted locations that differ from experi-
mental observation by less than the room temperature Doppler width of NO
(.005 & or .0005 nm) for almost all lines.  The wavenumber region of interest
is defined by the first and last line numbers of that region.  The present
version of the program reads 474 lines.  Normally. 1 to 30 of these lines
are examined in a given run.  Also contained in Part One of the main program is
the assignment routine for the f -number of the transition.  Since experimental
evidence  indicates that transitions originating in the ^T]/2 state have a larger
f-number  than those originating in the ^3/2 state, provision has been made for
a  spin dependent f number.

     _D.I_.b._2._Main,_Part 2

     Part Two of the main program reads and decodes the input line designation.
The line  designation consists of the branch of the transition (P, Q, R for
J'-J" = -1,  0, +1), upper spin state, lower spin state, and the rotational
level  in  the lower state.  The upper electronic state is slightly split (spin
split) into  two levels by a weak interaction of the electron spin with the
magnetic  field generated by the spinning molecule (and other effects, Ref .
Herzberg  1939) .  Absorption transitions terminating in the J = K - 1/2 level
are designated with a 2, while those terminating in the J = K + 1/2 level are
assigned  a 1.  A similar system is used to define the level of the lower elec-
tronic state in which a transition originates.  The lower state ( TT) is strongly
split by spin-orbit coupling.  The separation of the spin 1/2 and spin 3/2
                 * 1                                               7
levels is ^120 cm  .  Transitions originating in the lower energy  T]/2 state
are assigned the value 1, while those originating in the higher energy  ^
state are assigned a 2.

     Thus a line with J = 10.5 and K = 11 in the upper electronic state and
with J = 11.5 in the lower spin energy level of the lower electronic state
(i.e.   ^1/2) would be labelled P21 (11.5).  From the above discussion it can
be seen that' in general an absorption transition originating from a given J
value can terminate in any one of twelve possible systems, since there are
three branches and four possible combinations of levels for each branch.

                                        D-2

-------
     Also  found in Part Two is the calculation for the line center absorption
coefficient,  KO(I).   The variable I is incremented by 1 as each line center
absorption coefficient is calculated.   (At this stage, KO(I) does not contain
the path length over which the absorption takes place).  In determining this
coefficient the three subroutines FUPPER, FLOWER, and HONNUM are accessed to
determine  the upper state energy, lower state energy, and the Honl-London
factors,  respectively, for the transition.  Also at this time, the line location
option is  queried.   If the theoretical line option was selected, the line
center transition wavenumber (WO(I)) will be given by the difference of the
upper and  lower state energies resulting from FUPPER and FLOWER.  If the experi-
mental line location option was requested, then the wavenumber read with the
line designation is used for WO(I) .
     Part Three of the program establishes the wavenumber region in which the
transmission calculations are done.  The wavenumber region will begin 2.0 Lorentz
widths and 2.4 Doppler widths (DELTAW) before the line center wavenumber of
the first line selected and will end an equal amount, DELTAW, after the line
center wavenumber of the last line selected.   The region defined by these
start and stop wavenumbers is divided into 499 panels.  The transmission is
calculated at the wavenumber of each of these panels.  The transmission is
obtained  for  a panel  from  Beer's Law, I  =  IQe   v     The  absorption  coefficient
kv is determined  by summing  the absorption coefficients  at  the  panel from  all
spectral  lines which  contribute significantly  to  the transmission at that
panel's wavenumber.   To determine  if  the  absorption  at a panel  from a given line
is significant, its contributrion  to  kv is divided by the total absorption coef-
ficient determined from all  lines  previously examined at that panel.  If this
quotient is less  than a value given to  the variable  ALLOW, a counter (NHOLDER, NHOLDL)
is indexed.   This counter  is reset to zero if  the  quotient becomes  greater
than  allow.   When the counter value  increases  to  three  (indicating  that  the
Allow condition has been met three times  consecutively)  the  transmission cal-
culation will advance to the next  panel.  The  consecutive stipulation reduces
the chances of exiting the coefficient  loop when  encountering an isolated weak
line.  In addition to the ALLOW check for the  absorption contribution,  the
loop cannot be terminated  if the absorbing line's  center wavenumber is within
DELTAW from the, panel being  examined.   The absorption coefficient must  frequently
be evaluated  at some  distance from line center.   For the Voight profile  used,
this value  (k . )   is related  to the line center absorption coefficient kv . by  the
              vi                                                          1
expression
          kvi = kv° Re
                                       ,2>
exp(-(ui + ia'r) erfc(-\)i + a') j             Dl
                                        D-3

-------
where

            Re = Real Part
                          o,
                                                                        D2
                    AvD
             o
            v. = line center wavenumber
            v. = wavenumber
            Av_ = Doppler width of the line
                = Lorentz width of the line
             erfc = complementary error function

 The  expression  for 1^. is evaluated in the subroutine WFUNC.


     When the transmission calculation has been completed  for all 499 panels
the program advances  to Part Four.
     The function of Part Four of the main program is to record the inputs of
Part One and each panel transmission and wavenumber on a temporary file for
later use by another program (PLOT.).  The entire program MAIN will be repeated
for each NO concentration.  When an end-of-file is detected in the input data
file DATA-2, the main program will terminate.

D.I.c.  Input File DATA-2

     In order to facilitate changes in the input parameters such as path-
length, gas temperature, and NO concentration, these values are placed in a
data file named DATA-2.   This file also contains the spectral line information and
selections for the various options.  Since DATA-2. is also used as an input to
a resonance absorption program (NO-SPECT.), some of the entries in DATA-2. do
not apply to NO-ABS.  A partial list of DATA-2. with appropriate definitions
follows in Table D-I.

     More concentrations  can  be added  to  the  end of  DATA-2  if  desired.   The
numbers appearing after the spectral line designation are the center wavenumber
of the transition as reported by Deezsi (1958).  Many of these lines were not

-------
                                                          TABLE  D-I
O
     1234567

     045
     100
     001
      45100
      45478
      48500
                   9  10  11  12  13  14  15  16  17  18
                                              column
      A
      6
      1
      2
  F   =   3

'  6
  5   9   5
      800
      600
      1  8  .
      1  0  .
      0
3  0  5  +  H +
                                           0
                                           4
                                           4
Variable

LINST
LINEND
NWOTHE
HEADS


APRIME


TA

EL
Comments

Integer
Integer
1, Theoretical Lines
0, Experimental Lines

Does Not Apply
Blank line
Version Code
Does Not Apply

Function of pressure,
temperature, broadening
constant
Degrees K
Does Not Apply
Path Length (cm)
Does Not Apply
      0
      0
      4
1
2
3
4
5
P
P
P
P
P
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
( 1
( 1
(
( I
<
0 .
1 .
9 .
2 .
8 .
5 )
5 )
5 )
5 )
5 )
4
4
4
- 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
. • 0
7
7
3
3
3
8
8
         7  4  R  2  1  (  3  9
                          5  )
  6953
      1  5
               First Spectral Line
               Second Spectral Line
               Third Spectral Line
               Fourth Spectral Line
               Fifth Spectral Line

               474th Spectral Line
               Blank line
               No Nitric Oxide
               1st Nitric Oxide
               Concentration

-------
resolved by the instrument used; hence several different lines may appear at an
identical wavenumber.  More highly resolved values for the line center wave-
numbers are available in Engleman et al (1970).   Another input data file with
Engleman's experimental line locations exists in file DATAENG.  This list
does not contain nearly as many lines as DATA-2. am' is only a partial tabulation
of all the lines listed in Engleman et al.  Choosing the theoretical line
locations (i.e. placing 001 in line 3 of DATA-2.), while using DATA-2. will very
nearly reproduce all of the experimental values available in Engleman, et al.
A partial list of the difference between Engleman's experimentally measured
line center values and those derived theoretically can be found in Fig. Dl.
The differences are generally less than the room temperature Doppler width of
         o
NO  (.055 A or  .0005 nm).  At high rotational values, the theoretical locations
 for the  ?22  lines systematically diverged from  the experimentally measured values.
 For highest  accuracy,  lines should be arranged  from lowest to highest energy
 (increasing  wavenumber).


D.I.d. NO-ABS. FUPPER

     The purpose of this subroutine is to calculate the upper state energy
of  the Y(0,0)  transition.  The equations and constants used  are the same
as  those described in  the text see Section III-B.6.d.

 D.I.e. NO-ABS. FLOWER
     This subroutine calculates the lower state  energy for  a y(0,0)  transition.
 The equations and constants used are the same as those described in the text
 see Section II-B.6.C.


D.I.f. NO-ABS.WFUNC

     Subroutine WFUNC calculates the off-line center fractional absorption
coefficient (kv./ky9) for a particular spectral line.   This is accomplished by
determining the real part (Wl) of the function.


                             W(z) =  exp  (-z2) erfc (-iz)

where         i =  \/-l
              z =  ^j + ia'  (See NO-ABS Main, Part 3).

The technique for  evaluating this function is taken from Abramowitz et  al. MBS
Handbook of Mathematical Functions.  There are basically two methods used  to
determine Wl.  If  either ujj or a' are in the intervals

                                      0  * wj  ±  3.9
           or
                                      0  < a'  <  3.0,
                                        D-6

-------
                     THEORETICAL (EUPPER-ELOWER) VERSUS EXPERIMENTAL LINE LOCATIONS
 i
 o
 ft.

 to
' U
 I
                 o
                 oc
                 LU
                 Q_

                 X
                 LU

                 3

                 I
                 o

                 H
                 LU

                 CE

                 O
                   e.4-1
                    e.2H
   8.8-i
jE -8.2

3
                   -6.4
                                               DOPPLER

                                               WIDTH
18        15



         (J-0.5)
                                                                26
                                                         25
38
                                                                                  p

                                                                                  o

-------
,
the value Wl is obtained by a  two-dimensional linear  interpolation from the
nearest Wj and a' values found in  the block data  table BLOCK-DATA  (see Davis
 et al (1976) for  listing).  This table  consists of a  31  by 40 by 2- array whose
 elements  are labeled  by z(Al,  Bl,  Cl) where Al corresponds  to a1,  Bl  corres
 sponds to UK,,  and Cl  corresponds to  the  real or imaginery  part of  W(z)  i.e.,
 Wl or W2.

      The element  z(ll, 3, 1) is  the real part of  the  function w(z)  evaluated
f or z= 0.2+1. 01, while the element z(ll, 3, 2)  is the imaginery part  of
the same function and argument.  Conversion of the  arguments  of  z  to  a  table
 element is accomplished by taking  the integer portion of ten  times the  argu-
ment  value plus one.  This procedure yields 31 real values  for a',  and  40
real  values for w^  since each  is evaluated in increments of 0.1  over  the
regions previously  defined.  For example, to locate the real  part  of  u(z)
 for z = 0.2 +  1.0 i,  the element Al is found by multiplying 1.0  by ten,
adding 1 and taking the integer  portion  of this sum.  Thus Al for  a'  equal  to
 1.0 is 11, and similarly Bl for  to. equal to 0.2 is  3.  Therefore the  real
part  of W(z) will be  found in  the  table  element z(ll, 3, 1).   When the  argu-
ments of  z = tOj + a'i are nonzero  beyond the first  decimal place,  this  tech-
nique automatically results in the nearest table  element less  than the  desired
value.  The nearest table element  greater than the  desired value is obtained
by adding one  to  the  values Al and Bl just found.   From the table  elements
 found at  these element locations,  the two-dimension linear  interpolation
approximates the  desired value of  W(z) .

      For values of  u-j and a' greater than 3.9 and  3.0  respectively,  polynomial
approximations for  W(z) are used.  For tU and a'  in the intervals
                                   3.9 < 0)^  < 6.0

or
                                   3.0 < a1 < 6.0

W(z) is given by

                           W(z) = iz  (T1+T2+T3) + e(z)

where                      TX = .4613135/(z2 - .1901635)

                           T2 = .09999216/(z2 - 1.7844927)

                           T3 = .002883894/(z2 - 5.5253437)

and
                           |e(z) I  < 2 x 10~6.
                                         D-8

-------
When either w- or a' is greater than 6.0, W(z)  is given by

                              W(z) = iz  (Tl 4- T2) + n(z)

where                       Tl =  .5124242/(z2 -  .2752551)

                            T2 =  .05176536/(z2 - 2.724745)

and
                             n(z) | < 10~6.


     The  last part  of  this  subroutine  is devoted to  evaluating W(z) when
either or both arguments  of z  are negative.   In  practice,  the evaluation  for
negative  argument is not  needed.   Likewise,  for  this  application  all  the  ele-
ments of  the  block  data table  labeled  z(Al,  Bl,  2) are never used  since these
correspond  to the imaginary part  of  W(z).

D.I.g.  NO-ABS. HONKUM

     Subroutine HONNUM calculates the  normalized Honl-London factor for deter-
mining the  intensity of a given  transition.   The equations are normalized such
that the  summation  of  the Honl-London  factors over all the upper  state J values
(JT) for  a  given lower state J value (J") equals 4(2J"+1).   In  general, inten-
sities of absorption transitions  originating  in  the J = 1/2 rotational level
must be considered  separately  (Earls (1935))-   These  intensities are

                                   Q21 = Qn  =  4/3

                                   R21 = Rn  =  2/3

All other branches  are identically zero.  In  nitric oxide, the spin-orbit
coupling  constant is so large  that the intensities of lines connected to
the J = 1/2 level are  correctly  predicted to at  least eight significant digits
by  the general expressions  given.


            D.II. Program  Description of  Resonant Absorption of NO  Radiation

     The  program NO-SPECT.predicts the fractional transmission of  radiation
through a gas mixture  containing  a known amount  of nitric  oxide.   The inci-
dent radiation is obtained  from  excited  nitric  oxide  molecules at  low pres-
sure.  The  program  construction  and  description of NO-SPECT.is very similar
to the program NO-ABS.previously  discussed.   The differences are  contained
                                         D-9

-------
mainly in defining the spectral distribution of the incident radiation.  For
NO-SPECT. the incident intensity is obtained from an experimental measurement
of individual spectral lines emitted by the source and from an assumed Doppler
broadened line shape.  The transmission is calculated on a line by line basis.
Each source spectral line in the selected wavelength region is divided into
100 panels starting 2.3 Doppler widths (DELTAW) before line center and ending
an equal amount beyond line center.  The incident intensity at a given panel
is found by assuming a Gaussian lineshape of known full width at half maxi-
mum (FWHM) centered on the center wavenumber of the transition.  The relative
maximum intensity of the source line is obtained by linear interpolation from
a table of experimentally derived intensities that have been normalized by
the respective Hbnl-London factor of the measured line.   This table is con-
tained in the data file DATA-2 in lines 4, 5, and 6.  See discussion of FUNC
for more information on source line strength.  The absorbing line's strength at
each panel is determined in a manner identical to that described in the discus-
sion of NO-ABS.

     At the completion of NO-SPECT., the integrated intensity of each lime
leaving the absorbing gas is recorded on a temporary data file.  The line
intensities are recorded with each line's center wavenumber in groups for each
concentration of NO listed at the end of the data input  file DATA-2.   This
information is read into another program, PLOT, that convolves these lines
with a spectrometer slit function and displays the results graphically.

     An additional section exists at the end of NO-SPECT.MAIN Part Three that
outputs the integrated fractional transmission of very closely spaced line
groups.  This option cannot be accessed by the input data file DATA-2.  To
obtain output from this option the mandatory GO TO statement (GO TO 560)  must
be removed from the program.   These cluster transmissions are required for
determining source characteristics.
     All subroutines used for NO-SPECT. are identical with those described in
NO-ABS.  An additional subroutine  (NO-SPECT. FUNC) is required for source line
intensities (see D.II.a below).

     Additional variable definitions for variables found only in NO-SPECT. and
a figure (Fig. D-2) further describing the model's operation are found in the
variable definition section.
                                       D-10

-------
D.I.f. NO-ABS FUNC

     To predict the amount of transmission of resonant radiation through a gas,
the relative source intensity at each line must be known.  Many times there
are overlapped lines or lines which cannot be resolved by the spectremeter and
whose intensities are not directly measurable.   This subroutine linearly inter-
polates all line intensities from a least squares fit of normalized resolved
lines whose intensities can be directly measured.  For electrical discharge
lamps, a log-linear plot of the measured spectral line intensities divided by
their respective Honl-London factors versus the line's upper state energy will
typically result in a curve shown in Fig. 20.  For our purposes this curve
was fit with two straight lines.  The intensity of any spectral line can now
be approximated from these two straight lines once the upper state energy and
the Honl-London factor for the trasition are known.
                                        D-ll

-------
                                                      CONVOLUTION SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
(-•
S3
     u
     01
                                    -RESONANT LAMP LINES



                        4 '       (DLAM-|XLAM-\1/DLAM)

                                5
                         -H	
                          PI  ANG(5)
                                                                                     I-[((XLAM-X)/DLAM]-1.66512)2)
                                                                                              t
                                         10
ANG(6)    P1
XLAM
                                                               DLAM
P2  ANG(10)
1

11
•
12
	 1—
3
NOTE: LINE NUMBERS
ARE ARBITRARY


                                                              •WIDE-
                                                            (GAUSSIAN)
                                                              •WIDE-
                                                           (TRIANGULAR)

                                                                 SLIT FUNCTION
                                               GAUSSIAN (	)
                                               ISTART = 5
                                               NOPTS= 8
P2     WAVELENGTH(X)
                                        TRIANGULAR (	
                                        ISTART = 7
                                        NOPTS = 3
                                                                                                 Tl
                                                                                                 P
                                                                                                 O
                                                                                                 to

-------
                               D.III. List of Symbols
MAIN (NO-ABS)

     G(n)

     QVIB

     ALLOW



     LINST


     LINEND

     NWOTHE



     XDATA(I)


     YDATA(I)


     NP

     HEADS

     AP

     TA

     TE

     EL

     YHGT

     BVEQ0

     AFL

     C1S12
- Vibrational energy of nth vibrational level

- Vibrational partition function

- Ratio of absorption coefficient for a given line to total
  absorption coefficient from all previous lines at a parti-
  cular wavenumber
   V
- Line number of first spectral line defining start of interval
  to be examined

- Line number of last spectral line to be examined

- Conditional branch variable to select theoretically-computed
  line locations (=1), or use experimentally-determined line
  locations  (=0)
                                            o
- Wavenumber array of resolved upper level (I) source spectral
  lines

- Normalized logarithmic intensity array of resolved source
  spectral lines

- Number of source lines used to characterize source output

- Version label

- Broadening parameter (a1)

- Absorber temperature

- Emitter temperature (applies  only  to  NO-SPECT.)

- Path length of absorption

- Records option taken for variable NWOTHE

 - Spectroscopic constant for the zero vibrational state

 - Spin orbit coupling constant for lower level
 - f number for transitions connected to the  ^
                                                             1/2
                                        D-13

-------
C1S32
- f number for transitions connected to the  ^3/2 level
C2        - hc/kTA

CONST1    - -2>/£n(2)

CONST2    - Doppler width of source divided by  line wavenumber
            (2/2(£n2) kTU/inC2)
                        LJ  S

CONST3    - Doppler width of absorber divided by  line wavenumber
            (/ITInT) kTA/msC2)

CONST4    - 2.3  • (CONST2)

J         - Spectral line position in array of  spectral lines input,  (not
            the  rotational level)

RJPP      - Rotational level (truncated integer)

JPP       - Rotational level (truncated integer)

BRANCH    - Rotational branch  (P,Q,R)

ICODE     - Rotational branch  (=1, P,  branch,  = 2 Q branch, = 3 R branch)

NUP       - Spin split state in  upper level (2£)
                                       •j
NLO       - Spin  state in lower  level ( TT)

WO(J)     - Line  center wavenumber of line number J

ISPIN(J)  - Array of lower spin  states for all  spectral  lines in  input list

S(J)      - Honl-London factor of the Jth line

NLINES    - Total number of spectral lines read from input list

ENO       - Nitric oxide concentration (molecules/cm )

KO(I)     - Line  center absorption coefficient  of Ith lines

NINT      - Wavenumber range of  interest is divided into  this many  panels
           (max.  499)

DWJ       - Doppler width of source
                                         D-14

-------
DWL

DELTAW

WST

•WND

AZJ


BZJ


DEL
 JLEFT


 SUML


 SUMR


 NHOLDR


 NHOLDL


 NLESR


 NLESL


 BETA

 WFUNC
  Doppler width of absorber

  2 Lorentz widths + 2.4 Doppler widths absorber (cm"1)

  Wavenumber at beginning interval of interest

  Wavenumber at ending interval of interest

  Lower wavenumber limit of mandatory computation  for
  given spectral line

  Upper wavenumber limit of mandatory computation for a given
  spectral line

  Incremental wavenumber of panels in region of interest

  Center wavenumber of Ith panel

  Source intensity of Ith panel (constant)

   4>  when examining lines of  larger wavenumber  than  present
   panel;  = 1 when examining  smaller

  Total absorption coefficient from all lines of wavenumber
  greater than, or equal to, nearest spectral line

  Total absorption coefficient from all lines of wavenumber
  less than, or equal to, nearest spectral line

  Number of consecutive lines whose contribution to the total
  absorption coefficient is less than minimum required

  Number of consecutive lines whose contribution to the total
  absorption coefficient is less than minimum required

  Number of consecutive lines whose contribution to the total
  absorption coefficient is less than minimum required

  Number of consecutive lines whose contribution to the total
  absorption coefficient is less than minimum required
- 2/£n2 (v•-v! V(Doppler width of absorber)
  Complex complementary error function to determine absorption
  coefficient at arbitrary distance from given spectral line
  (fraction of line center absorption coefficient)
                                       D-15

-------
TERM


TNEW


II

CAY(I)


DAT(I)

TAUTOP

TAUBOT

TAU

ALPHA

W02(I)

TJ2(I)

   FUPPER

V

J

M

T

G

WE

WEXE

BE

ALPHAE

DV
- Absorption coefficient at arbitrary distance from given  spectral
  line (fraction of line center absorption coefficient)

- Absorption coefficient at arbitrary distance from given
  spectral line

- Rotational level

- Total absorption coefficient for the Ith panel from all
  spectral lines considered

- Intensity of Ith panel after passing thru absorbing gas

- Total transmitted intensity

- Total incident intensity

- Ratio of transmitted intensity incident intensity

- Ratio of absorbed intensity to incident intensity

- Reordered panel wavenumber, largest to smallest

- Reordered panel transmissions (see W02(I))



- Vibrational level

- Rotational level
                                   2
_ Spin split level in upper state  ( E level)

- Term value of electronic level

- Term value of vibrational level
  'Ve
- D
                                       D-16

-------
BV
- B,
GAMA      - y


FN        - Term value of rotational  level


F         - Term value of upper  state (  Z level)

   FLOWER
V


J


M


USS


T


G


DV


A


BE


BV


WE


WEXE


IB


NSIGN


LMDADB


F
          - Vibrational level
            Rotational level


            Lower spin state (  TT  level)

                                             i-\
            Spin split level of  upper  state (ZL level)
          - Term value of electronic  level
          - Term value of vibrational  level
          - DT
- Lower  state  spin-splitting  constant
          - BT
                                                     level)
          - B.
             v
   WFUNC
XF
          - W
- Rotational branch


- Direction of lambda doubling  shift

                                                     f~\
- Magnitude of lambda doubling  term in lower  state  ( IT  level)

                              n
- Term value of lower level  ( IT)





- Same as BETA (MAIN .NO-ABS)
                                        D-17

-------
YF        - a' (Broadening parameter)

Wl        - Interpolated real part of the complex function W(z) where  z  =  XF + YF i

WZ        - Interpolated imaginary part  of  the  complex function W(z)

Z(DUM1,DUM2,  1) - Real part  (W(DUM2  + (DUMl)i))

Z(DUM1,DUM2,  2) - Imaginary part  (W(DUM2 +  (DUMl)i))

X(DUM)    - Real Tart of W(z)  (Table Value)

Y(DUM)    - Imaginary part of  W(z)  (Table Value)

IFLAG     - Conditional branch variable whose value is
            <(> -».when - XF > YF  >  
            I   when XF < $,  YF > 
            4   when XF < <£,  YF < 

II        - Converts YF into an  integer - 1  (Lower bound  in  table  look-up
            for YF)

JJ        - Converts XF into an  integer - 1  (Lower bound  in  table  look-up
            for XF)

III       - II+l upper bound in  table look-up for YF interpolation

JJ1       - JJ+1  upper bound in  table look-up  for YF  interpolation

Zl        - Linearly interpolated value  for XF  with Y=CONST=II

Z2        - Linearly interpolated value  for XF  with Y=CONST=II1

W(l)      - Interpolated real  value  of W(XF+YF  i)

W(2)      - Interpolated imaginary value of W(XF+YF i)

ZC        - z - XF+ YFi  (complex) =  argument of W  function
HONNUM

NUP

NUPP

MEGAN
- Upper vibrational state (v1)

- Lower vibrational state (v")

- Upper spin state
                                        D-18

-------
MEGAM     - Lower spin state

IB        - Rotational branch

J         - Lower rotational level

A         - Lower state spin-splitting constant

BE        - Be

ALPHAE    - ae

BV        - Bv

RNUM      - Numerator  of Honl-London  factor

DENOM     - Denominator of Honl-London factor

HONL      - Honl-London factor for transition
    MAIN (NO-SPECT)
XDATA(I)

YDATA(I)



TE

CONST2


CONST4

EO(J)

NINT


W(I)

E(I)


DIST
              -  Lower  state wavenumber of  source spectral line

              -  Natural  logarithm of resolved source spectral line
                 intensity normalized by  the Honl-London factor of
                 the  transition

              -  Source Temperature

              -  Doppler  width of source  divided by line wavenumber
              - 2.3 times CONST2

              - Line intensity of Jth source spectral line

              - Number of calculations  (panels) performed over a single
                source spectral line

              - Wavenumber of Ith panel of a given source spectral line

              - Intensity of Ith panel of a given source spectral line
                (Gaussian shape assumed)

              - 4.6 Source Doppler widths  FWHM
                                        D-19

-------
TAUTOP        - Integrated intensity of lines passing through the
                absorbing gas

TAUBOT        - Integrated intensity of lines incident on absorbing gas

   FUNC

X         - Wavenumber of upper level transition of line of interest

XDATA     - Wavenumber array of resolved upper level transitions for source

YDATA     - Natural logarithm array of normalized resolved source
            line intensities
NP        - Number of points used to characterize source line intensities

NP1       - NP minus 1

FUNC      - Linearly interpolated normalized natural logarithm of the
            intensity of unresolved source line
                                       D-20

-------
                          D.IV. Program Description PLOT.PLOT5

D.IV.a. Introduction

     The program PLOT. PLOTS convolves the spectral transmission calculated in
programs NO-SPECT. and NO-ABS. with a spectrometer slit function to aid in
reducing experimental data.  Results of the convolution are presented graphi-
cally.

     The program is divided into four parts.  A discussion of the function
of each part is presented in the following section.

D.IV.b. Discussion

                   (hie
     Part One of the program reads the transmitted intensity and wavenumber
at each wavelength present in the radiation source.  For resonant radiation
(NO-SPECT.), these wavenumbers are the center wavenumbers of each line.
The transmissions at these wavenumbers are the integrated intensities of
individual lines (i.e.,  the transmission verses wavenumber is nonzero only
at the center wavenumber of the transition; no direct information on line
shape is contained in these transmissions) .  For absorption from a continuum
source (NO-ABS.), the wavenumbers read are uniformly spaced throughout the
region of interest.  In  this case, the original lineshape of the absorbing
line is retained.  Original input parameters for NO-SPECT. or NO-ABS. are
read for documentation purposes on the plots.  Options are presented for
plotting the data as read  (zero slit plots) in addition to the -convolution
plots generated by PLOT. PLOTS.  At this time, the user is also queried for
the slit width of the convolution.  The slit width is defined as the apparent
full width at half maximum transmission (FWHM) of a resolved line in the
experimental spectra.  The slit width must have units of angstroms (A).  Part
One continues with a conversion of the original wavenumbers to wavelengths.
Since line order (increasing wavelength) is assumed in the construction of
later parts of the program, Part One contains a sorting loop (ISORT) which
looks twenty lines  ahead of the present line location to resort lines
and intensities for continually increasing wavelength.

                   Tw
     Part Two produces plots of  the data as received after the line  sort
operation described in Part One.  A vertical  line is drawn at the location
of each wavelength initially read.  The relative heights of these vertical
lines are proportional to  the spectral intensity read at each wavelength.
These plots are referred to as zero slit plots, since no instrument  broaden-
ing has been included.  It should be reemphasized that plots for resonant
absorption  (NO-SPECT.) do  not retain line shape information.  Zero slit
                                        D-21

-------
plots for resonant absorption, and absorption of continuum radiation are
shown in Figs. D3 and D4, respectively.  Part Two also sets  the  convolution
interval (T,'IDE) for Part Three.

     D-RM^S JPart Three

     Part Three computes the resultant intensity verses wavelength when the
individual intensities are examined by a measuring intrument  (spectrometer)
of finite resolution.  The transfer function of the spectrometer can be
determined by scanning and examining the resultant profile of a  spectral line
whose bandwidth is very narrow relative to the spectrometer's bandpass.  For
the spectrometer used in our measurements, the transfer function can be
approximated as a triangular function for bandpasses greater  than 0.5 A and
by a Gaussian function for bandpasses less than 0.5 A (Figs.  D5  and D6) .  To
produce the convolved spectral plots, a wavelength region starting twice the
convolution interval  (2'WIDE) before the wavelength of the first spectral
line and ending an equal amount after the last spectral line  is divided into
2499 panels.  At each panel, a convolution interval is defined (WIDE) whose
width is twice the spectrometer slit function for the triangular case and
six times the slit function for the Gaussian case.  This convolution interval
is centered on the panel at which the calculation is being performed.  Beyond
this interval, the contribution to the convolution is considered to be zero.
A loop is set up to determine the first spectral line number  (ISAVE) and
total number of spectral lines (NOPTS) within the convolution interval.
Starting at spectral  line number ISAVE, the intensity of each of the next
NOPTS lines is weighted with a Gaussian or triangular function according to
the relation.

             TRIADD = HT(JBL) exp  (- [(XLAM-ANG(JBL))/DLAM •  1.66512]2)

or

                   TRIADD = HT(JBL) [DLAM-  |  xLAM-ANG(JBL)|] /DLAM

where TRIADD is the weighted intensity, HT(JBL) is the original  line inten-
sity,  DLAM is the FWHM of the spectrometer in angstroms,  XLAM is the panel
wavelength at which the convolution is taking plare and ANG(JBL) is the
wavelength of the spectral line being weighted.   Figure D2 presents symbol
definitions graphically.   Weighted intensities at the edge of the convolu-
tion interval for the Gaussian case are down by more than 10"   relative
to the same intensity at the center of the interval.  The weighted intensities
over the entire convolution interval are summed under the variable name
SUMMER.   When the sum is completed, the value of SUMMER is placed in the
array PLOTY (KKOUNT)  and the center wavelength of the convolution interval
is placed in the array PLOTX (KKOUNT) where KKOUNT is the panel number at
                                       D-22

-------
                           ZERO SLIT WIDTH PLOT FOR RESONANT LINE SOURCE
ID


O
t.

I
JO
                     END  =   .000
                     ZERO SLIT WIDTH
                    02 LIN  X2+F=4  T
TE
TA

A
 399. K
1000,. K
 18.6 CM
   seeee
                2210     2220     2230    2246    2250
         >260     2270    2280"
                                             (nmx 10)
                                                                                            O
                                                                                            CO

-------
                                 ZERO SLIT WIDTH FOR CONTINUUM SOURCE
o
I
t J
                          NQ =  8909+16
                          ERO SLIT WIDTH
                          F=3.395+H+C
                                Tft =   295.  K
                                        8.6  CM
                                         84799
«..
¥
   
-------
                                           SPECTROMETER TRANSFER FUNCTION, 1000/um SLITS
                                                                                          TRIANGLE, FWHM = l.uA (0.114nm) (USED IN COMPUTER)


                                                                                          EXPERIMENTALLY OBSERVED


                                                                                          GAUSSIAN, FWHM= 1.225A (0.1225nm) (FOR COMPARISON)
o

NJ
     (D
     !
     o

     I
     10
                                                                                                                                      D
                                                                                                                                      01

-------
                                         SPECTROMETER TRANSFER FUNCTION, 100jum SLITS
o
i
                                                                                          EXPERIMENTALLY OBSERVED
                                                                                          GAUSSIAN, FWHM = 0.174 A (0.0174nn
                                                                                                                              P

                                                                                                                              O
                                                                                                                              at

-------
which  the calculation was performed.   The weighting and  summing  process  is
repeated for  all  2499 panels.   The maximum  value in PLOTY  (KKOUNT)  is
assigned to the variable SPM&X  and the first  value of SPMAX (no  nitric
oxide) is assigned  to the variable DIV.  The  variable DIV  is  divided into  the
intensities of each panel for each concentration to normalize the maximum
peak height to unity for plotting purposes.   The remaining sections of Part
Three  write the values  of PLOTX and PLOTY into  a temporary storage  file  and
reread  this  file  for display purposes when all spectra for each nitric  oxide
concentration  have been  calculated.   This file is also used for wavelength
scale expansions;  no new calculations are done when a scale expansion  is
requested.   Sample convolved outputs  for a continuum and a resonant  absorption
case are  shown in  Figs.  D7  and D8.   Numerical values for features in the  con-
volved  spectra can be obtained utilizing Part Four of PLOT. PLOTS.
     Part Four produces  the  numerical value of  extrema  on  each  concentration
 curve for a given wavelength  range.  This  option  is  accessed by  a  carriage
 return after  the completion  of the  convolution  plots.   The wavelength  of
 the start of  the extrema interval is assigned to the  variable XSTR  and the
 end to XSTP.  The minimum and  maximum values and their  wavelengths  within
 this interval are determined.   The  extrema  of the  first case  (no  nitric
 oxide) are used to  normalize the extrema  of following cases.  This  results in
 the fractional value  of  the  extrema for each curve in the  specified interval.
 The extrema,  fractional  extrema, extrema  wavelengths, and  concentrations are
 presented followed  by a  request to  determine if another region  is to be
 examined.  A  response of ' NO1  (include blank before  word  NO) will  terminate
 the program.  A sample of this option is  included  in  Fig.  D9.
                                       D-27

-------
                    CONVOLUTED SPECTRUM FOR CONTINUUM LAMP, SLIT FUNCTION FWHM = 0.020A
o
I
oo
                 1.25-n
                 1 09-
                 0.75-
                 0.50-
                 0.25-
                 0 00
TA =  295. K
L  =  18.6 CM
A  =  5.84700
DLAM=    .0200
* F=3.305+H+C
GAUSSIAN  LNSHPTHEOR. LINES
                                                        +16
                             T
          T
I
I
I
T
   10
   u
   I
   01
                                                1   I   '    I
2265.2        2265.6        2266.0        2266.4        2266.8

       2265.4        2265.8        2266.2        2266.6

                         WAVELENGTH,  A
                             (nm x 10)
                                                                     P

                                                                     O

-------
                CONVOLUTED SPECTRUM FOR RESONANT LINE SOURCE, SLIT FUNCTION FWHM = 1.60A (0.16nm)
o
    in
    I
    o
    u
    I
                 199 -i
                   88 —
                   66 —
?!
                             «   306.  K
                             =  1800.  K
                             =   18 6 CM
                                   50900
                          DZ  LIN X2*F=4  ,T
                          TRIANG
             MAXIMUM
        NO     HEIGHT,  IN
        .000          1.00
        900>16        44
WAUELENG.TH,  A

    (nm x 10)
TAU
 1  080
   512
                                                   O
                                                   CO

-------
                                        EXTREMA DISPLAY
             DO VOU UAHT EXTREHA?


            >YES

             DEFINE INTERVAL.



            >8865.7,2865.85
                                                H8/08/A 3F A-1.1
o


o
             WIN-  .9992 AT 8865.764
                                             RAX- !.•••• AT 2265.?••
             NIN-  .5853 AT 8865.763      RAX-  .9858 AT 8865.699

                       HIN RATIO-  .5858      RAX RATIO-  .9858
             DO VOU UAHT EXTRENA?



            > YES

             DEFINE INTERVAL.



            >3265.85,8266.
                                                H8/08/A 3F A-1.1
CNOD • NONE





CN03 • CORB
             NIN-  .9991 AT 8865.881
                                             HAX-  .9998 AT 8865.983
             NIN-  .6464 AT 2265.926      NAX-  .9859 AT 8865.849

                       NIN RATIO-  .647t      NAX RATIO-  .9858
CN03 - NONE




     • com
8

o
u
I
                DO VOU UANT EXTRENA?



               >NO
                                                H2/02/A 3F A-1.1
                       P

                       a
                       (O

-------
 D.IV.d.   List of Symbols
                PLOT.PLOT 5
NCASE

ISTART


DATE1

TIME1

STMAX

XMIN

XMAX

DLAM2

IPLT1I


PLTMIN

PLTMAX

YHGT



NLINES

ENO

TE

TA

EL

APRIME

TAU

HEADS
counter  for  concentration  case

flag for no  NO  concentration  (equals  1  for  NO = 0.s
                                      0  for  NO + 0.

date of  run

time of  run

maximum  line intensity

minimum wavelength  to be plotted

maximum wavelength  to be plotted

slit function of  spectrometer in angstroms  (FWHM)

option for plots, 1 for zero slit plots
                  0 to delete zero slit plots

same as LINST

same as  LINEND

indicates method  of obtaining line locations for data
(YHGT equals  1  for  theoretically computed line locations
and 0 for experimentally measured line locations)

total number  of spectral locations read
                              2
NO concentration  (molecules/cm )

Source temperature  (Kelvin)

absorber temperature (Kelvin)

path length  of absorption  (cm)

gas broadening constant

integrated fractional transmission

program version code
                                       D-31

-------
IPLOT1

DLAM

LINST

LINEND

LINT

ANG(I)


HT(I)

IS1

IS2

WIDE


II

XPLT(l)

XPLT(2)

YPLT(l)

YPLT(2)

ISAVE


KKOUNT

DELLAM

PP1
same as IPLT1I

same as DLAM2

starting spectral line number

final spectral line number

total number of spectral lines read

wavenumber of Ith spectral line (later converted to
wavelength)

intensity of Ith spectral line

line number of start of wavelength sort

line number of end of wavelength sort (IS1 + 20)

width in angstroms of spectral region to be convolved
at a given wavelength

same as LINT

line center wavelength

same as XPLT(l)

0

integrated intensity of line at XPLT(2)

line number of first spectral line in convolution
interval

panel counter (1-2499)

total wavelength interval divided by 2499

wavelength of first panel
                                        D-32

-------
SPMAX
                   maximum convolved intensity for a given concentration
PI

P2

XLAM

I


NOPTS

IPN1

JBL

SUMMER


TRIADD
                   wavelength of start of individual convolution interval

                   wavelength of end of individual convolution interval

                   center wavelength of convolution interval

                   counter to determine which spectral lines lie within the
                   convolution interval

                   same as KOUNT

                   line number of last spectral line in convolution interval

                   counter for lines within convolution interval

                   integrated intensity of all lines within the convolution
                   interval
                   line intensity weighted by slit function

PLOTX(I)           wavelength of convolved line transmissions (Ith panel)

PLOTY(I)           intensity of convolved line transmissions (Ith panel)

DIV                maximum convolved intensity for no NO present

TRNCAS (NCASE,!)   array of intensities for each concentration (NCASE) at Ith panel

DECIS              option for extrema in wavelength region specified

XSTR               starting wavelength for extrema option

XSTP               ending wavelength for extrema option

Jl                 counter for concentration case
STLOOK
                   XSTR minus one percent of extrema interval
                                       D-33

-------
SMALL





BIG





DIF1





DIF2





LAMIN





LATIAX





MI NSAY





MAXSAV





MINRAT





MAXRAT
minimum transmission over extrema interval




maximum transmission over extrema interval




minima check




maxima check




wavelength of minimum transmission




wavelength of maximum transmission




minimum transmission with no NO present




maximum transmission with no NO present




minimum fractional transmission




maximum fractional transmission
                                        D-34

-------
                                   NO-ABS.MAIN
     KC
     ZlCtttmXXXXXtXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXUIXXXIXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXfX
     3lC PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI     PARTI
     4lCXXXtXX«XXXXttIXXXXXX*XX*XXXXt*«*XXX*(***XXXXXX*SI*XXXX*X*»t*SXXXXt**»(
     5«C
     6>      REAU4 KO
     7i      INTEGERX4 P.O,R.ltANIC
     81      INTEGERX4 BRANCH
     9>      DIMENSION S(SM),n.,UO(5M)
     10:         DIMENSION U02(5
     11 «      DIMENSION HEADS<2«>
     12i      DIMENSION KO
     16t      DIMENSION U(5M),E(5M),CAY(5««).DAT(S««)
     17»      G(LEU)-19«4.4«5X(LEW+.5>-14.187X(LEU+.5)XX2
     181      AUOU'.Ol
     19>      READ(5,4) LINST
     Ml      READ(5,4) LINENO
     211      READ(5,4) HOOTHE
     E2l    4 FORT1AT(I3)
     23 »    8 DO 12   I«1,1M«
     241      READ  (5.1«  )XDATA(I),VDATA(I)
     2S«   !• FORnAT(8>l«.«)
     86 1       IF (XDATA(I).EO.t.M) GO TO  14
     27t   12 CONTINUE
     21«   14  CONTINUE
     391      NP-I-1
     3»t       NP1-NP-1
     3H       L1R2-2
     32 «       IUU-9
     33 «       IVL-t
     34 1       READ (S.WHCAW
     351    2» FORTMT(Z«M)
     36 «       READ (5,14«)DELFIT
     37 »       READ (S.14*>SUT
     38t       DLAfl-SLIT
     39<       READ <5.14«>AP
     44 «       READ (5.14«)TA
     411       READ (S.14«)TE
     421       READ (5,14«>El
     43 «       READ (5,14t)VH6T
     441       READ <5,4«)IPIOT1
     4«i       READ (5,4«)IPLOTZ
     4CI    4« FORNATCail)
     471    M FORnAT(Il.aflt.»>
     4ft       URITE (6,SM)TA,TC.D«).CUTAU,ALPHA

     MiC      BVCM 1C TIC SPECTROSCOPIC  CONSTANT FOR THE ZERO VII. STATE
     fit       lUEM-l.raSM
     SI>C
     S3IC       ATI IS THE LOUOt STATE SPIN SPt-ITTINC
     541       AR.-lZ3.li
54I>

-------
                                     NO-ABS.MAIN  (CONT'D)
 S«»C         INCLUDE TEHP. CORRECTION TO POP. DIST.  FOR PARTITION  FUNCTION
 57>      Cl>3.T796E-14XlUEOe/(TASt (3. Oe/2.D«)S(l>EXP( -1.43836*
 58 «     X
 S9iC
 60       COflSTl— 2.D»»DSORTlDLOC<2.I»)>
 65 «      CONST2-1.3«7D-7» SORT(TE)
 661      CONST3-1.3«7D-7« SORT(TA)
 67i      CONST4-3.E-7*SORT(TE)
 681      WRITE <6,80>HEAD$,AP
 69t   W FORI1AT(1H1,2«X,2«A4.1«X.3MA'«.F7.4)
 71tC«St«tSt>tSfSSSS*t*SSS»SS»S»S>ttSXSSS»S»SSS>S«>SHtSttISSIS*SS«SttSS
 74IC
 751      J-l
 76i  1M READ (5,12*>BRANCH,NUP,NIO.RJPP,UO(J>
 771      ISPIN(J)-NLO
 78<  12« FO»»flAT(3X.Al.Il,Il,lX,M.»,lX,Fll.»)
 79<      IF (WJANCH.Ed.lLANK) CO TO 24*
 8«i      JPP-RJPP
 81t      IF (MARCH. EO.P) GO TO 18*
 82 «      ICODE-3
 83i      IF (MANCH.EQ.Q) GO TO 16*
 84t      CALL FUPPEW(IUU.NUP.JPP*i.FU)
 8St      CALL MONNUmiyU.IUL.NUP.NLO,JPP+l,JPP,3,S(JM
 86>      GO TO 2t«
 87t  14» FOR«AT(4F1«.»)
 88 1  !€• CALL FUPPER(IUU.NUP.JPf»  ,FU)
 89 «      CALL HONHUn(IUU.lUL,NUP.NLO,JPP.JPP,2,S(J))
 9ti      ICODE-2
 9H      CO TO 2t«
 92>  1M CALL FUPPER(IUU.NUP,JPP-1.FU)
 93i      CALL MOMHUn(IUU,IWL.NUP.NLO,JPP-l.JPP.l,S(J))
 941      I CODE* 1
 95<  2t* CALL FLOgEU(IUL.MLO,ICODE,NUP,JPP,FL(J))
 96 t      IF (NUOTNE.E0.9) GOTO 2l«
 97i      UO(J)-FU-FL(J)
 98*  21« CONTINUE
 991      J-J«1
!«•>      GO TO 1M
!•!«  24« CONTINUE
itf>      NLINES-J-1
i«5«  2C* READ (5,14«,ENt-«t»)EHO
1*41      OUII-».
l*Ci      IZ-«
          DO 28* IUCE-XZ.C
      CM OUI8-OVI|4EXP<6i*0(IUCC»
          DO 3M I-l.NLINES
1991       C1-C1S12
ll*i      IF (ISPIN(I).EO.a) C1-C1S3E

-------
                                          NO-ABS.MA1N  (CONT'D)
    lilt       l-Cl«StttXS»*t»t>S*S«»SSStlSS*ttt**»*tt*SS*S*lt*B**«*St*tt*
    116 1C PART3    PART3    PART3    PART3     PAUT3     PART3    PART3    PART3
    n?tCtii>ttttttttstiitsiiii«tsisittitttsts!tsst(tistxi«tsitsx*sstsisitist>is
    118IC
    1191       UHOLD-UO(LINST-l)
              UNTOT-e
    1241       TAUTOP-8.D6
    125i       TAUIOT-e.W
    126:        J-LINST
    127i       DO 5W I-1.NP2
    128t       DUJ*CONST2
    13««       UST.UO(LINST)-CONST3»UO(LINST)I2.39t(«P*l)
    13H       UND-UO(LINEND)*COHST3*UO(LINENO)t2.39t(«P*l)
    133t       A2J*UOU)-DCLTAU
    1331       BZJ*UO(J)^DCLTAU
    134J       DIST-1ZJ-AZJ
    13Si       DeL-(UHD-UST)/NINT
    136i       U.GT.(UO(J>+DCITMJ» J-J+1
    139:       IF (ENO.EO.t.) GO TO 4M
    14«i        IF (J.GT.LINENO) GOTO 5««
    1411       JLEFT-*
    1421       SUHL-t.
    143t       SUnR««.
    1441       II. J
    1451       NHOLDR-*
    14€«       NHOLDL-t
    1471       NUSR*«
    148i       NLESL**
    149i   32* DUL>COHST3XUO(II>
    !S«i       IF (AP.EO.t.) GO TO 349
    ISH       iCTA— COHSTlS(U(I)-yO(II))/DM.
    15Z«       CALL UFUNC(irrA,AP.TERfl,DUm>
    153t       GO TO 36«
    1541   344 TEWl.EXP<-((U(I)-UO(II»tCOMSTl/DUL>«2)
    155t   36» CONTINUE
    ISC!       TtCU-KO(II)«TEJW
    1571       IF (JLEFT.EO.l) GO TO 42*
    15tt       SUHR-SUm+THEU
    159t       IF (UO(II).GT.U.LE. ALLOW) NLESR-MLESR*!
    1631       IF(NHOLW.EO.MLES«) NLESR**
    1641       NHOLOR-NLESR
    ISSt       IF(NLESR.E0.3) GOTO
    16£t   3M CONTINUE
16*0

-------
                                                 NO-ABS.MAIN (CONT'D)
               It7 i      11-11*1
               in i      co TO 3Z9
               169>  4M JLEFT-1
               17»i      II-J-1
               1711      If iJ.EO.l) 60 TO 469
               1721      GO TO 32«
               1731  4ZC CONTINUE
               174!      SUHl-SUNUTNEU
               ITS i      IF (UOUn.lT.um.AND.TNEU.EO.e.) GOTO 46*
               17fit      IF (II.CQ.l) GO TO 46t
               irrt      ir  NLESL-NLESUl
               179<      IF(NHOLDL.eO.NLCSL) NLESL-9
               180i      NMOtDL-NLESL
               181!      IF (NLESL.E0.3) GOTO 46t
               1821  44« CONTINUE
               I83i      II-II-l
               184!      GO TO 32«
               ISSi  469 CONTINUE
               186 1      CO TO
               187i  48* 5UNL-e.
               188!      sum-e.
               1891  S99 C«V(
               19*1      SUfll-t.M
„              192!      DCL2-DCI/2.D9
Y              193t      00 S2t  I-I.NP2
^              1941  5» D*T( I )•£* EXP(-CAV(I)»EL)
00              1 95 1      URITE(21.1t«9)(MT(I),U(I),I-l.NP2)
               19C<  IMtFOWMTC  ',2(616. 8. 3X) >
               1971      DO 54*  I-l.NIHT
               1981      Sum-Aim *K12«IMT< I HDATUM))
               199!
              2*1 i
              2«2tC
              2M»C PART4    PART4    PMTT4    PAAT4    PART4    PART 4    PART4    PART4
              2«5tCXXtTA{Tt.E*0,El1TAU,ALPMA
              21«t  Stt FOWIAT(//.5X,'TA-',Elfi.t,5X,'TE-'1ElS.8,5X,'NO-'.E16.8,5X.'L-'
              211t     1E16.8.5X./.5X,'TAU-',E16.8,5X,'AI>MA.',E16.8)
              2121      PLTHIN-1.
              1131      PLTIMX-5M.
              2141      VN6T-NUOTNE
              Cifi      UtITE(2«)SLIT,PLTNIN1PLTmx,DCLPl.T.DLAN,VMOT,NLINE$>EHO,
              tlCt     lTE.TA,EL,IPLOTl.IPtOt2
              t!7t     2.L1W.AP
               :18>     3.TAU
               t9i     4.HEMW
              22«i      LINT-NINT*!

-------
                                                     NO-ABS.MAIN (CONT'D)
               ttli      DO
               222«      UT-LINT*!-!
               223t      U02(I»-U-DAT(UCT>
               22St  999 COMTINUC
               226>       UfflTE (2«) (U02(I).TJ2(I),I-1,LINT)
               227<      GO TO 260
               228<  62*  CONTINUC
               239«      STOP
               23«>      END
           23«»
o
i
UJ
vD

-------
                                          NO-ABS.hWPRK
      H      SUtROUTINE FUPPER(U,n,JINDEX,F>
      3«C     SUWOUTINE FUPPER CALCULATES THE ROTATIONAL ENERGY OF  THE UPPER
      4iC     ELECTRON STATE FOR A GIUEN UI1RATIONAL STATE(U).  A GIWEN SPIN
      5tC     STATE(H), AMD A GIUEN ROTATIONAL STATE(J)
      6iC
      7:      INTEGER U
      8<      REAL*4 J
      9i      J-JINDEX*.S
     lOi      T- 43966. 8643
     111      UE'8374.307
     12i      WEXE- 16.1*6
     13>      IE -1.9977
     141      ALPHAE-.»198
     15i      DU-4.6D-6
     16>      IU-1.98S76
     17i      GAI1A-.W276
     18i      GO TO (3e,4*),n
     19!   29 FN-IU*(J«.5»(J-.5H.SSGMMS(J-.S>-DU«(J+.S>SI£*(J-.S»S2
     2*<      GO TO 6«
     2H   49 FN-»Ut(J*.5)t(J»1.5)-.5*G<«A«(J»1.5)-DVt(J*.5)«8*(J*1.5)t«a
     aat   6« CONTINUE
     34«      F-T+C*FN
     ZSi      RETURN
     26i      END
EOT t 26

-------
                                          NO-ABS .FLOWER
      It       SUIROUTINE FLOUeR       REAL*4 J.NU.JBAR.LUDADB
      9:       J-JINDEX+.S
     l«"t       JBAR-J+.5
     11:       P--1.17E-a
     13«       0-*7.8E-5
     13«       T-e.
     14t       G*0.
     15«       D04.5E-*
     16t       A-123.19
     18:      ALPHAE-.ei728
     19!      By-BE-ALPHA€*(U*.S)
     8«t      BU-1.69S68
     ai«      C— 5.8E-4
     32 i      YU-(A+C»(J-.5)»t2)/BU
     33:      UE*1M4.4«5
     34:      UEXE-14.187
     as:      nu-ixi/Bv
     as i
     39«      G-UE*(VH.S)-UEXE»(y*.5)*»a
     3«t      NSIGN-1
     31 :      IMUSS.EO.H) GOTO 5
     32:      IF(IB.NE.8) GOTO 19
     33:      NSIGN--1
     34:      GOTO  !•
     35 :    5 IF(IB.EO.a>GOTO !•
     36:      NSIGN--1
     37:    16 CONTINUE
     38:      GO TO <2«.4«).H
     39:C
     4«:C            SPIN 1/2 STATE
     41:    29 FN-FN-SORT( ALPHA )»BV
     42:      LflDAI>B-(((a.-YV)/(a.«SORT(ALPHA))-l. )t(.5tP*0)+0/S«rr(ALPHA)
     43 :     XX JBARtta- 1 . ) )t JBAft/2 .
     441      CO TO 6*
     45:C
     46 1C             SPIN 3/2 STATE
     471    44 FN-FmSORT( ALPHA )tBV
     4f:      LTOAOB-C ( (2. -W)/(8.tSOirr( ALPHA ) )*1. )»(.5tP*0)*a/S«rr( ALPHA)
     49:
     51<      RETURN
     52t      END
EOF i 52
• O

-------
                                       NO-ABS.FUNG
      II       FUNCTION FUNC(X.XDATA,YDATA.NP,NP1)
      2«       DincNSiON xDATAciee>.vDATA CO TO 4«
      6>    a» CONTINUE
      7t       FUNC-(VDATA(NP)-VOATA(NPl))t(X-XDATA(NP))/(XDATA(NP)-XDATA(NPl))+V
      8>      IDATA(NP)
      91       RETURN
     10«    4« FUNC-(VDATA(I*l)-VOATA(I))/(XBATA(I*n-XDATA(I))t(X-XDATA(I))
     111      1+VDATA(I>
     13l       RETURN
     13)    6« FUNC>(VDATA(Z)-VDATA(1))X(X-XDATA(1))/(XDATA(£)-XOATA(1))4VDATA(1)
     HI       RETURN
     151       END
EOF«15

-------
                                         NO-ABS.WFUNC
      It       SUtROUTlNE  UFUNC
      a-EXP(-ZtS2>E*FC<-IZ>  (SEE NATIONAL IUREAU OF  STANDARDS
      6«C      HANDBOOK OF MATHEMATICAL FUNCTIONS,  PACE 287)
      7tC
      8«       IMPLICIT REAU8(A-H,0-Z>
      9i       REAL XF.Yf.gi.ua
     let       COMPLEX ZC,UC,J.ZS,TltT2,T3
     11»       COMMON/-TAILE/Z<31,44,2>,X<44),Y<31 )
     12t       DIMENSION  U<2>
     13«       IFLAG-e
     14t       IF(XF.LT.«.)IFLAC-IFLAC*1
     15«       IF(YF.LT.«.)IFLAC-IFLA6*3
     16<       Xl-AtS(XF)
     17»       YI-A»S      60 TO (M,l«f.lM.ia«),IFUM
     381   44 IF (Xl.CT.fi.M.OR.YI.CT.e.M) 00 TO «•
     33i      J*(«.*«,1.M)
     34t      ZC-CMPLX(XI.YI)
     35t      ZS'ZOZC
     37t      T2-.»9999216M/(ZS-1.7t44927««)
     3tt      T3-.f«e8838944«/(Z
     39t      UC-J«2CKT1*T2*T3)
     44t      Ul-(OC*COnJG(UC))t.S*«
     4H      U3-(CONJC(UC)-WC)«Jt.
     421      IF(IFLAC.EO.f)RETURN
     43 »      GO TO  (8«,lM,lM.12t>,IFLAC
     441   €• J-(«.M,1.M>
     461      ZC-C«PU«XI.YI)
     461      ZS-ZC«C
     471      T1
     49i      UC-J»ZC*(T1*T2)
     Ml      Ul>(UC+CONJ6      IFUFLAC.CO.t>«CTURN
     S3 1      00 TO  (M,l«t,lM,18«).IFLM
     54 1   74  FORMAT  (//  'ft IFLAG IN UFUMC-'I3//>
     ssi   w ue— us
SCO

-------
o
                                                       NO-ACS.WFUNC  (CONT'D)
           S9O
MI
f7t
MI
59 1
Ml
6U
681
631
641
65i
661
67i
68i
69i
                    1W
                        RCTURN
                        Ul-CtCOSfCO-Ul
                         WRITE (6,791
                        RtTURN
                        G-a.MXCXP(VISVI-XISXI)
                        U1*G>COS(GG)-U1
                         URITE(6,7*>  IFLM
                        RETURN
                        END

-------
                                      NO-ABS.1IONNUM
      ll       SUBROUTINE HONNUH,HONL)
      2lC      SUBROUTINE HONNUfl CALCULATES THE HONL-LONDON FACTOR UHERE
      3lC      NUP-UPPER UIBRATIONAL STATE
      4»C      NUPP-LOUER UIBRATIONAL STATE
      StC      HESAN-UPPER SPIN STATE
      6iC      HEOAfl-LOUER SPIN STATE
      7iC      J«J"
      8«C      IB-1 FOR P BRANCH, -2 FOR Q BRANCH, -3 FOR R BRANCH
      9iC
     1*:       REALM J
     tl»       J-JPP+.S
     12:       AM23.18
     13:       BE- 1. 7*437
     14t       ALPHAE-.ei72S
     15«       B<.i-BE-ALPHA£*(NUPP *.S)
     16t       YU-A/BU
     17«       Tl-Z.Ol.
     18«       T2-TUT1
     19«       T3-l./SQRT       CO TO 44»
     29t    W RNUfl-T2-Tirr»(4.»JM2+4.«J+l.-2.tYU)
     31 t      CO TO 44«
     321  l*t CONTINUE
     33i      CO TO (l2*,14«),NE6Afl
     34t  129 RNUn-T2-TltT3«(4.*J«t244.«J-7.*a.»VV)
     35i      OENOn-«.*J
     36:      CO TO 44*
     37«  14t RNUn-T2*Tl«T3«(4.tJ««e*4.«J-7.+2.»W)
     381      D€NOfl-8.«J
     39 «      CO TO 44«
     4«i  160 CONTINUE
     41t      CO TO (184,24«),fCGAN
     42:  184 CONTINUE
     43 «      CO TO (2*O.ZZ«),nEQM1
     44t  2M RNUn-Tl»((4.«Jt»a+4.»J-l
     4S»      DCMOn-8.«J»(J*l.)
     46 1      CO TO 44«
     471  229 RNU«-Tl*(4.»J«2»4.tJ-l.-T3«(l.*Jt*3412.tJS»2-2.JJ-7.*2.rA;))
     4ft      DENOfl>8.SJt(J+l.)
     49 >      CO TO 44«
     6«t  24« CONTINUE
     Sit      60 TO (2M,tM),rCQM
     SZt  BSO RNUH-TU((4.«J««2*4.«J-l.)-T3t(«.«J$I>t2.tJ»t2-2.»J+l.-2.»YU»
     sat      DENon-s.«j«

-------
                                    NO-AUS.HONNUM  (CONT'D)
     M<
     571      GO TO 44«
     Sflt  3tt CONTINUE
     59«      00 TO (32«,3M>.fCGAN
     M>  32* CONTINUE
     6H      GO TO (34«,3t«>,HEGAn
     621  346 RNUn«TZ*TUT3»<4.«JU+4.tJ-7.+2.*YV)
     63<      DENOH-».»  3C* RNU««Te-TlIT3t<4.tJMa+4.tJ-7.»a.tYV)
     66>      0€HOfl-8.»  449 CONTINUE
     TCI      IF  00 TO 4M
     77t
     Ttt      RETURN
     79i  4C« HONI-*.
     Ml      RETURN
     •It      END
•1O

-------
                                                        NO-SPKCT.MAIN
                 nc
                 2iCtst>si*s**tt«sts*ssssts*>ttt*ss«s»*«s>«»tsi**s
                 3«C PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI    PARTI     PARTI     PARTI     PARTI
                 4:Ct*t«*tSS«t«t(*tSS*t*t*tV«*S*>»t«**SS**SS*t*t*******tSSS*«SS**fS***SSSSt
                 S:C
                 6 1       REALM KO
                 7t       INTECER*4 P.O. R, BLANK
                 8t       INTEOERM BRANCH
                 9:       DIMENSION S(S0«>,Fl(5«6>,UO(5««),EO
                1«:         D I HENS I ON U02(S««),TJ2(5«e>
                111       DIMENSION HEADS(2ei
                12:       DIMENSION KO,ISPIN
                13:       DATA BLANK/'  '/, P/'P'/.0/'0'/,R/'RV
                14 «       COrWON/PAREn/CONSTl,COMSTa,CONST3,UO,EO,KO,NLIKS
                IS"        DIHENSION XDATA(iee).YDATA(ie«)
                16t       DIMENSION U(5«« ),E(5«« ),CAY(5W ),DAT(5»9 ),EJ(5ee),TJ(5«« )
                17s       G(LEy)-19e4.4e5I(LEU+.5)-H.187*(LEU+.5)**2
                18!      ALLOU-.ftl
                19:       READ(5,4) LINST
                2«:       READ(5.4) LIMEND
                311      READ(5.4) NUOTHE
                33:    4  FORfWT(I3)
                23i   8  DO  12  1-1. IMt
                241      READ  (5.19  )XDATA(I),YDATA(I)
                25:   10  FORIWT(8F1«.«)
                36:       IF  (XDATA(I).EQ.e.M)  CO TO 14
                27:   \Z  CONTINUE
O               28:   14  CONTINUE
 '               29:      NP-I-1
•^               3««      NP1-NP-1
                31:       L1R2-2
                32:       lw«
                33:       IUL-9
                 34 «       READ  (S.atttCADS
                35:   2«  FORnAT(2«M)
                36:       READ  (5,14»)DCLPLT
                 37:       READ  (5.14«)SLIT
                 3«:       DLAfl-SLIT
                 39t       READ  (5,14«)AP
                 4«t       READ  IPLOT1
                45 «       READ  (5.4«)IPLOT2
                46 :   4«  FORMAT (211)
                471   6«  FORMAT(I1.2F1».«)
                48 :       URITE (6,SM)TA,TE.ENO,EL,TAU,ALPHA
                49>C
                5«>C        BVCO* IS THE SPECTROSCOPIC CONSTANT FOR THE ZERO VII. STATE
                Sit       tUECt*1.69SC2
                 53 :C         ff\. IS THE  LOWER  STATE SPIN SPLITTING
                 54t       AFL-1S3.S8
                 558C

-------
00
                                                      NO-SPECT.MAIN (CONT'D)
                  Sic         TOP COUKCTION rod POPULATION DISTWIWTION
                  i      ClO.7799D-14ttUE09/XU*EXP(-1.4393CX
                  Si     X(ATL-2.t»UE09)/TA»>
                  iC     _      _
                MIC    iNtcrr 9PiN DEPENDENT F NUHKR
                Cli      C1S32-CI/3. 94X3.89
                Ut      ClSia-Cl/3, 64*3.53
                63i      C2— 1.43939DO/TA
                661      CONST2-1.397D-7X WTfCTf )
                6€i      COWST3-1.307D-7t SOTT(TA)
                67i      COMST4-3.E-7»SOirr(Tt)
                ifi      MITE  (C.M>HCAD$,<*
                69 >   M FO(mAT(tHt,Z«X,2«M,l«X,3HA'-,r7.4)
                7«iC
                7iic»tn**ssssmxm»smmsss«tmsmstsusnstssnss*mssx«smstti
                72iC FAm   PMTT2    PMTT2    PMTTC    PMTT2    PMTT2    PMTT2    PMTT2
                73tcmttsmsxxsmtmmsxmmmmmssnmxsstxssm<*sssmssms
                74IC
TSi
76i
771
7«i
791
991
•it
•21
•31
941
•Si
96i
•71
•91
99i
91i
92t
93i
941
9Si
96 1
97t
99i
99i
199IC
191 1C
totic
1931
1941
19fi
199i
197i
1991
1991
1191
1190
J*l
199 READ 9RANCM,NUP,NLO.RJPP,UO<.I)
129 FWmATC3X.Al.Il.Il.lX.F4.9,lX.Fll.f)
IF (MMNCH.E6.9LANK) GO TO 249
IF (IftANCM.EO.P) GO TO 199
IF (MANCH.EO.O) GO TO 1C9
ICODC-3 	
CALL HONNUmiMMUL'NUP,Nto.JPP+l.JPP,3.$>
GO TO 299
149 FORNAT(4F19.9>
1C9 CALL FUPPER(IUU,NUP,JPP ,FU)
CALL MONNUmiUU,IWL.NUP,NLO.JPF.JPP,2.S
CALL MONNUmiUU.IVL.NUP.NlO.JPP-l.JPP,l,S)
ICOK*1
299 CALL FLOUER(IUL.NU>iIC09E,NUP,JPP,FL(.m
IF (NMOTHC.E0.9) GOTO 219
UO(J>-FU-FL(J>
•19 CONTINUE
E0( J )-$( J >9EXP
-------
                                       NO- SP
                                                        (CONT'D)
   UK      NlINES-J-l
   llZi  269 READ  <5,14«,END-62«)ENO
   1131
    115t       DO  284  IUEE-IZ.5
    116t   23*  OUIB-OXill*EXP(C2*C  C1-C1S33
    130:       B-Cl*S(I)'OVIB*EXPSS**I
    12? :C  PftRT3    PART3    PART3    PART3    PftRT3    PART3    PART3    PART3
    127:C
    128:       UHOLD-UO(LINST-l)
    129i       LINTOT-e
    130t       IS«U€«1
    13lt       NINT-1W
    132t       NP2-NINT+1
    133«       TrtUTOP-e.M
    134t       TAUBOT-e.De
    135:       DO 5€« J-LINST.LIf€ND
    136:       DWJ-COMST2*UO(J)
    137:       DELTfty-COMST4*UO(J)
    138:       ftZJ-yO(J)-D€LTAU
    139:       IZJ-UO(JHD£LTAU
    14«:       DIST-»ZJ-A2J
    Hit       DEL-DIST/MINT
    142:       DO 5W I-1.NP2
    143:       U(I)-AZJ*(I-1)*DEL
    144:       E(I)-EO(J)I EXP(-( (U( I )-UO< J ) )«COHST1/
    14S:       IF (EMO.EO.e.) GO TO 48«
    146:       JLEFT-*
    147:       SUHL-e.
    148:       SUTR.*.
    149:       II-J
    154:       NHOU**t
    151:       NHOLDU-*
    152:       NLESft**
    153:       HLESL-*
    154:   38* DUL-CONST3WOUI)
    155:       IF (AP.E0.0.) GO TO 344
    156:       1CTA— COHSTlt(U< I )-»»( II ) )/DUU
    157t       CALL UFUMC(KTA.AP.TERn.IXjnS)
    158>       GO TO X9
    159i   34» TERfl*EXP(-((U(I)-UO(II))*COMSTl/DUL)tt2>
    l£«i   X9 COHTINUe
    16H       TNCU'tCOdDSTEim
    162>       IF (JLEFT.EO.l) 00 TO 4M
    1641      IF (UO(II).GT.U(I).AHD.TNEU.EQ.«.) GO TO 4M
    1651      IF (II.EO.NUNES) CO TO 4M
1650

-------
                                         NO-SPECT.MAIN (CONT'D)
    16€>       IF  (UO(II).LT.IZJ) CO TO 3M
    1«7«       IF  .LE. ALLOW) NLES»-NLESR*1
    1681       IF  (NHOLDR.EO.NLESR) NLESR-e
    1601       NMOLDR-NLESR
    1701       IF  (NLESR.E0.3) GOTO 4««
    171«   380  CONTINUE
    172i       11-11*1
    l?3i       CO  TO 329
    1741   400  JLEFT-l
    I75t       II-J-1
    17ei       IF  (J.EO.l) GO TO 460
    177f       GO  TO 320
    ITS*   420  CONTINUE
    179i       SUHL-SUHL*TNEU
    180»       IF  iUO(II>.LT.U.AND.TNEU.EO.*.> CO TO 46*
    181 <       IF  (II.EO.l) GO TO 460
    1821       IF  (UO(II).GT.AZJ) CO TO 44*
    1831       IF  (AISCTNEU/SUflD.LE.ALLOU) NLESL-NLESL*!
    184t       IF  (NHOLDL.EO.NLESL) NLESL-*
    18S:       NHOLOL-NLESL
    I8fii       IF  (NLESL.E0.3) GOTO 4€«
    187:   444  CONTINUE
    188*       II-II-l
    189>       GO  TO 32t
    19«i   46«  CONTINUE
    191 <       GO  TO 5«t
    192t   48»  SUm.-«.
    193i       SUHR-*.
    194t   5M  CAV(I)-SUm.*SUW
    19St       SUH1-9.M
    19S»       SUN8-9.M
    197!       DEL2-DELX2.M
    191i       DO  SZ« I-I.NP2
    199t   52*  MT( I )-£(!)» EXP(-CAV(I )tEL)
               DO  54« I- 1, MINT
               SUni-SUni«DCL2X(DAT(IHMT(I*l»
    2*3 «      EJ(J)-SUN2
    2»4i      TJ(J)-SUN1
    2*5i      TAUTOP-TAUTOf*TJ(J)
    £•€ i      TMJtOT-TMJtOT^EJ ( J )
    2«7iC  _
    2MIC  MCNOUC IMNMTORV GOTO 5€« TO OBTAIN INDIVIDUAL
    2*9 «C   LINE BUNOLC TRANSMISSIONS
    21*tC
    •ill      GOTO 5§*
    tilt        IF (CNO.EO.*. ) GOTO SC*
    «13i      SUm-Sl*!T*TJ(J)
    2141      SUHE-$unE*€J(J)
    tlSt      LINTOT-LINTOT*!
    etc i      TRNSLM-sunr/sunc
    tl7i      DOPCK*(UNOUMM>(J><(l.-t.5«CONST3))t(UHOLD-UO(J)*(l.*l.S«CONST3))
    Sift      IF (DOPCK.LT.*.) QOTO Sf7
    219i      IF (LINTOT.NE.l) GOTO 542
    22*1      URITE (6,555) LINTOT.TRNSLN
23*0

-------
                                                           NO-SI'KI'.T.MAIN  (OONT'D)
                 881t      GOTO 544
                 8881  5-42 CONTINUE
                 223t      URITt(6,55S) lINTOT.TRm.N2
                 2241  544 CONTINUE
                 225«      LINTOT-0
                 226*      sunr-e.
                 227«      sune-e.
                 228>      GOTO SS9
                 229«  557 CONTINUE
                 23«> 555  FORfWT  uex,I2,2X,El6.6)
                 231»      TRNLN2-TRNSLN
                 232*  559 CONTINUE
                 2331       UOINU-1.E+W/UO(J>
                 234t      WRITE  (6,550) J,TJ(J>,EJ(J).UO,WOINU
                 23S<      UHOLD-UO(J)
                 3361 559  FO*HAT(1X.I3,2X,4E16.6>
                 237«  56« CONTINUE
                 238 «C
                 239icsmt*sss*>«smsxs*st*ts*ttts*i*ss«»»*ssst>«s>»sism*ass»sstsfttt
                 240JC P««T4    PART4    PART4    P«RT4     PART4    PART4    PART4    PrtRT4
                 241SCttS>lXttS*St«XSSlS»tttXStt««tSt*tS*fSS**ttSSSt(S**S»StS«SSSttS*St*S
                 242tC
                 243:      TAU-TAUTOP/TrtUIOT
                 2441      ALPHA* l.M-TAU
                 2451      URITE  (6,5W)TA,TE,ENO,EL,TAO,ALPHA
                 246:   5W FOWMT(//,5X,'TA-',E16.8,5X,'TE-',E16.8,5X.'NO-',E16.8.5X.a-',
                 247«      lEie.S.SX./^SX.'TAU-'.Eie.S.SX.'ALPHA-'.Eie.S)
                 2481      Pl/rniN-UNST
0                249 J      PLTHAX-LINENI)
i                 25«i      VHGT-NUOTHE
*£                Kit      U»UTE(2«>SLIT,PlTmN,PVn*W,l«U»LT,DU*,VHGT. KLINES, ENO.
                 2S2«      1TE.TA,EL,IPLOT1,IPLOT2
                 2531      2.UR2.AP
                 2S4J      3.TAU
                 2551      4,HEADS
                 2S6i       LINT-LINEND-LINST+1
                 2S7i       DO 6M I-l.LINT
                 258:       UT-LINEWD-I*!
                 259:        U02(I)*UO(UT)
                 2€««        TJ2CI) • TJ(UCT)
                 2€1>   CM COWTINUE
                 262:        WRITS <2«) (U02(I),TJ2(I).!•!,LINT)
                 263:      CO TO 26*
                 264t   62*  CONTINUE
                 265i      STOP
                 266t      END

-------
                                                               PLOT.PLOT5



                   H       REALt4 LAniN,LANAX,NINSAU,nAXSAy,HINRAT,NAXRAT
                   HI       DATA NO''NO ••'
                   3>       DINENSION HEADS(20>,HDURt2«>,TRNCAS(3,2S99>
                   41       DINENSION HTSTOR<39>.ENSTOR(39>.TAUSTR(3«)
                   Si       PINENSION ANC(2S*e>,HT(25e«>.Pl.OTXl2See>,PLOTYC2S99)
                   6>      X ,XPLT(4),YPLTl4)
                   71        DINENSION ENSTUR(a>,APUR(2>
                   8IC
                   91C tt*S*IS«tt*tStt*t***tSS««(St
                  1*»C PART 1     PART 1     PARTI
                  11*C ti»t**»ttl*»ttt**»»tl»t»t»»i«
                  12>C
                  13>       NCASE-e
                  14:       ISTART-1
                  15!       CALL DATE (DATED
                  16t       CALL TINE(TINEl)

                  18iC
                  19tC     READ IN CONTROL PARAMETERS
                  29«C
                  21«        CALL INITT(24«)
                  22t        URITE (6,25)
                  23«    25  FORNAT (' FOR DEFAULT SCALES INPUT 9.,9.' /
                  24t      X    ' TO ILOU UP SCALE, INPUT HIM AND NAX FOR AISCISSA'/)
                  25<        READ (5,39) XNIN.XNAX
                  26i    39  FORNAT( )
„                 27<       IF(XniN.NE.XNAX) GOTO 36
i                  28i        URITE(6.32>
^                 2«:    32  FORNATC INPUT FUHN'/)
ro                 391        READ(5,39) DLAH2
                  3H       URITE (6,34)
                  32«    34 FORNATC TYPE 1 FOR ZERO UIDTN PLOTS'/
                  33«      X    ' TYPE 9 TO DELETE ZERO UIDTH PLOTS'/)
                  34t       READ (5,39) IPLT1I
                  35:    36 CONTINUE
                  36>        CALL ERASE
                  37tC  IF VALUES NOT tOTH ZERO WANT TO ILOU UP SECTION  OF PLOT  FROM  XNIN TO  XNAX.
                  38iC  VALUES UILL K AVAILABLE ON 28 SO UILL NOT REDO  CALC.
                  391        IF (XfllN .NE. XNAX) GO TO 415
                  49t        ISKIP-8
                  4H    49 READ (29.END-499)SLIT,PLTNIN,PLTNAX,DELPLT.DLAN.YHCT,NLINES.ENO,TE
                  42«      l.TA,EL.IPLOT1,IPLOT2.L1R2,APRINE.TAU.HEADS
                  43«        IPLOTi- IPLTII
                  441        LINST-PLTNIN
                  45i        LINEND-PLTNAX
                  46I        DLAN-DLAN2
                  471        IF (ISKIP .EO. 8> 00 TO 45
                  48i        NUNPLT • IPLOT2
                  49i        IF (NUNPLT .NE. 9) NUNPLT -1
                  59>        ISKIP • 8
                  Kit    4V  CONTINUE
                  58IC                   	
                  53tC     READ IN UAV€NUN9ER, TRANSMISSION PAIRS. CONVERT UAVENUNBERS
                  54tC     TO UAVELENGTH AND DETERMINE NAXINUN TRANSMISSION
                  SSiC
            550

-------
                                                              PLOT.PLtm  (CONT'D)
                 56 1       LINT-LINEND-LINST+1
                 571        READ <2«)  ,HT       IF(HT(ICARD>.LT.e. >HT< ICARD >•«.
                 6d>       STftAX-AnAXl(STHAX.HT >
                 6H       ANG< ICARD >-U.E+e8>/ANG( ICARD)
                 62«    60 CONTINUE
                 63 1       DO 65 I CARD- 1. LINT
                 64«       IS1-ICARD+1
                 65«       IS2-ICARD+21
                 6€i       DO 65 ISORT-IS1.IS2
                  6T«       IF (ISORT.CT.LINT) GOTO 65
                  £81       IF (AHG(ICARD).LE.ANC(ISORT)) GOTO 65
                  69i       TEHPl-AMG(ICARD)
                  78 t       TEW»a-HT(ICARD)
                  7U
                  72t
                  73«
                  74i       HT(ISORT)-TEHPa
                  7S»    65 CONTINUE
                  76:C
                  77: C t**SSS«S(SSt*StStS»tSSSSSSI*
                  78:C PART  3     PART 2     PART 2
                  79 tC *»**It»t«*»tt«*tt«»It«I»»*t*»
O                 8H      NCASE-NCASE*!
 '                 82:      II-LINT
Co                 83:      PLTniN-AHCU)
                  84t      PLTHAX-AMC
                  85 1      IF   GOTO 79
                  86tC  SET COfWOUmOM INTERVAL FOR GAUSSIAM SLIT FUNCTION
                  87:      UIDE>6.*DLAfl
                  88 <      GOTO 74
                  OTiC  SET CONVOLUTION INTERVAL FOR TRIANGULAR SLIT FUNCTION
                  9«:   70 UIDE'2.«DLAfl
                  91»   74 PLTHIN-PLTNIN-2.WIDE
                  92 <      PLTT1AX 'PLTnAX42.su IDE
                  93»      DELTA-STHAX
                  941   80 CONTINUE
                  95      IF  (IPLOT1.EQ.0)  GO TO 120
                  99t      XPLT(3)-PLTHIN
                  1000.
                  107t       CALL IINITT
                  1M«C  SUPPRESS X GRID
                  1091       CALL XFRfl(2>
                  110«       CALL DLIUXJPLTmN.PtTHAX)
             110O

-------
                                              PLOT.FLOT5  (CONT'D
    lilt       CALL DLIWYce., DELTA)
    ll«i       CALL CHECK  (XPLT.YPLT)
    II3«       CALL DSPLAY (XPLT.VPLT)
    1141       LAIPRT  • 18
    11S>       IX-SS4
    1161       IV-765
    117)      ENCODE (481.HDUR) HEADS
    118i 421  FORNAT (SA4)
    U9i       ENCODE ( 436. ENSTUR)ENO
    i2«i       CALL nouAis      CALL NOVAISU8*,725>
    12€<      CALL AOUTST(20,HDUR>
    1271       GO TO 429
    128i   88  CONTINUE
    129i      DO 199 1*1,11
    IMt      RLAfUANCm
    131>       IF (I .CT. 5M) GO TO 95
    1321   95  CONTINUE
    133>      IF (PLTniN.CT.RLAn.OR.PLTnAX.LT.RLAfl) CO TO 1M
    134«C  DfMU INDIUIDUAL LINES
    135i      YPLT(2)-AftINl(HT(I),iOOZE)
    136:      XPLT(l)-RLAfl
    137i      Xf»LT<2)-Xf»LT
    138<       CALL NOUEA  (XPLTd ).VPLT( 1 )  )
    139t       CALL DAAUA  (XPLT(2),VPLT(2)  >
    14«i   1M CONTINUE
    141t        CALL TSCNO
    1421       CALL riNPUT(l)
    143i       CALL ERASE
    1441   12* CONTINUE
    145»C
    14CIC  M«M«t«t»ttt»»WMM«M«t
    147iC  PART 3     PART 3     PART 3
    148 1C  ttttSSSSSSSXSItStSStSSttStSSS
    149IC
    15«iC     PRODUCE  THE ACTUAL SPECTRA PLOT
    151>C
    1521      ISAUE-1
    153t      KKOUNT-1
    lC4t      DClLAfl-(PLT»IAX-FLTNIN)/2499
    I55t      PPl-PLTPIN-DElLAfl
    15CI       SPWAX— 1M.
    1571   14« LOOK-ISAUC-1
    10>      IF(LOOK.LE.«)LOOK-1
    159 iC
    IMtC     CHOOSE A POINT ALONG THE PLOT AXIS AND SET AN INTERVAL OF WIDTH
    1«HC     EQUAL TO HALF THE CONVOLUTION WIDTH ON EITHER SIDE
              Pl-PPl««OUNT*D£tLAfl
    1641      P2-P1*«IDC
    KSi      XLAN-(Pl+Pe>t.5
1CSO

-------
                                                          PI.OT.IM.OT) (CONT'D)
I
l_n
Ln
                167 «C
                16S»C
                1S9IC
                1701
                1711
                1721
                1731
                17m
                1751
                176i
                177IC
                1781C
                1791C
                 181:
                 183:
                 18-41
                 185«
                 186 iC
                 187«
                 IBS:
                 189:C
                 191:
                 192 =
                 193:
195:
196:
1971
198<
                 299*
                 2*5:
                 2*6:
                218t
                219«
         KOUHT-l

         THIS LOOP  DETERT1INES WHICH LINES LIE IN THE CHOSEN INTERVAL

         DO  16«  1-1,11
         IF  (ANG(I).GT.P2>  GO TO 180
         IF  (AHC(I).LT.Pl)  GO TO 16«
                21HC
    KOUNT-KOUNT+1
16« CONTINUE
ISO NOPTS-KOUNT-1

    THE FOLLOWING STATEMENTS SIMULATE THE   SLIT  FUNCTION
    BY SUmiNC THE CONTRIBUTIONS OF ALL THE LINES  IN  THE INTERVAL

    IF (NOPTS.EQ.e) GO TO 229
    sunnER-0.
    IPNl-ISAVE+NOPTS-l
    DO 299 JiL-ISAVE.IPNl
    IF (DLAH.GT..5) GO TO 19«
 UCIGHTINC FACTOR FOR GAUSSIAN  SLIT FUNCTION
    TRIADD-HT(JBL)IEXP(-(ABS(XLAH-ANG(JBL))/DLAf1tl. 66512 )«2>
    GOTO 299
 WEIGHTING FACTOR FOR TRIANGULAR SLIT FUNCTION
19*    TRIADD*HT(JBL>*(DLAfl-ABS(XLAn-ANG(JBL)))/DLAn

    PLOTxdCKOUND-XLAfl
    PLOTV(KKOUNT ) •SUHHER
      IF (PLOTY(ICKOUNT)  .GT. SPflAX) SPflAX-PLOTV(KKOUNT)
218   CONTINUE
    ICICOUNT-ICICOUNT*!
    IF UKOUNT.EQ.2S«1> GO TO 24«
    GO TO 14«
22« PLOTX(lcrOUNT).XLAH
    PLOTV(ICICOUNT)-«.
    KICOUNT-KICOUNT-H
    IF (ANG(II).LT.Pl)  GO TO 24«
    IF (KICOUNT.E0.25*!) GO TO
    GO TO 14«
24« II-KKOUNT-1
    N-II
    IF(ISTART.EO.l) DIV«SPfMX
    DO 26*  I-l.N
    PLOTY(I)-PLOTY(I)/DIV
269 CONTINUE
                213>C
                214IC
          DETERflINC THE WWIIM! UALUE OF THE SPECTRAL CURVE AND IF THIS
          IS THE FIRST CURVE COMPUTED, THE V AXIS SCALE FACTOR IS CALCULATED

          IF( ISTART.EO. 1 )DELYP-SPmx
          PLOTY (*+!>••.
          PLOTY(N*2)-D€LVf
          PLOTX(N»1)-PLTHIN
          PLOTX(N*2)-DELPLT

-------
                                             PLOT.PLOTS  (CONT'D)
    2211      ISTART-e
    2221      TAUSTR-TAU
    223i      HT5TO««SPMAX/DELVP
    2241      ENSTORiNCASEI-ENO
    2251       URITE(28>NP2,ENSTOR.HTSTOR(NCASE).TAUSTR.
    236i     X  TA.TE.EL.APRINE.DELYP,HEADS,VMGT.(PtOTXCL),PLOTYa>.L-l.NP2>.
    227t     X  PLAH2
    ZZ9i       GO TO 4«
    2291  369 CONTINUE
    23«»C
    231 »C     PRODUCE THE FINAL SPECTRA PLOT
    232'C
    2331  3W FORMATCSX, 'N-'.E16.8.5X,'HT-'.E16.8>
    2341  4A« CONTINUE
    2351       END PILE 28
    236t       LABPRT-e
    23?i       REWIND 28
    2381  415 CONTINUE
    239>       NCASE'9
    24«t  42«  CONTINUE
    24K       NCAS€-NCASE*1
    2421       RCAD(28,END*4««)NP2,ENSTOR(NCASE),HTSTOR(NCASE),TAUSTR(NCASE>.
    243t     X  TA.TE.EL.APRIfC.DELVP.HEADS.VHCT.CPLOTXtD.PLOTVCDA'l.NPa),
    2441     X  DLAH2
    2451  418  CONTINUE
    24€t      N-NP2-2
    2471      DO 419 J2-1.N
    248*      TRHCAS(NCASE,J2)-PLOTV(J2)
    249t  419 CONTINUE
    2S«t       If (NUnPLT .EO. 8) CO TO 43*
    25H       CALL IINITT
    2S2>       IF (XfllN  .NE. XHAX) CALL DLIKX (XHIN.XmX)
    253i       CALL DLinv (•.,!.•«)
    2541      IF(XniN.EO.xnAX) CALL DLIKX(PLOTX(1).PLOTX(N)>
    2551C HO V LAIELS
    25fiiC      CALL VLAI(«)
    2S7iC SUPPRESS V AXIS
    2581       CALL YfW1<2>
    259tC PUT IN X TICS WT NOT  X GRID
    26*>       CALL XFRf1(2>
    2C1I       CALL CMECIC(PLOTX,PLOTY)
    2C2t       IF (NUHPLT .NE. 1) NUHPLT-8
    2*31C  PUT IN LAKLS FOR SCALE AND OTHER GENERAL ONES HERE
    2C4t  422 FORMAT (FE.t)
    2CS<  423 FORMAT (F5.1)
    £CC>  424 FORMAT (FS.5)
    2<7i  42C FORMAT (E8.4)
    2*8I  427 FORMAT(F7.4)
    2C9i  42t FORMAT(AC)
    I7«i       IX-2M
    B7tt       IV-7S5
    272t  429  COHTIHUE
    t73i      ENCODE (421.H8UR) HEAM
    274t       ENCODE (4tt,TCUI) TC
    2751       ENCODE (422.TAUR) TA
I7CO

-------
                                                 PLOT. l'LOTr) (CONT'D)
    2761        ENCODE (423,ELU*n EL
    377i        ENCODE (424,APW*> AP9INE
    278>       ENCODE (428, DATUfM DATE1
    8791       ENCODED 428. T I HUH) TINE1
    2Se:        CALL nOVA§S(4S0,S>
    281 «        CALL AOUTST < 13, 'UAUE LENGTH,  A')
    282 1       CALL fKK)AISl7Se,25>
    283t       CALL AOUTST ( 6, DATUfM
    284t       CALL mX*ABS(7SetS>
    28S:       CALL AOUTST<6.T1NUR>
    286«        CALL «OVABSUX,IY>
    287 1        CALL AOUTST ( 5. 'TE • ')
    283 t        CALL ACUTST (S,TEUR>
    289 t        CALL AOUTST (2,' K' >
    29«:        IY-IY-2*
    291 1        CALL ItOUABS (IX, IV)
    292t        CALL AOUTST (5, 'TA •  ')
    293«        CALL AOUTST 
    294 J        CALL AOUTST (2, ' (C ' )
    29S:        IY-IY-2«
    29€»        CALL fWyAISdX.IY)
    297t        CALL AOUTST (5,'L  •  ')
    298:        CALL AOUTST (5,ELUR)
    299 J        CALL AOUTST (3,' CH' )
    3»6i        IY-IY-26
    381:       CALL HOWAtSC IX, IV )
    39Zt       CALL AOUTST(5,'A   •  ')
    3*3 «       CALL  AOUTST (8.APOR)
    304:       IF  (LAIPRT .EO. 88 ) GO TO 88
    39BI       IY  -IV - 2«
    396i       ENCODE  (457.DLUR )DLAH2
    3*7i       CALL NOMAtSdX.IY)
    3*8:       CALL AOUTST 16,' DLAfl-  ')
    3*9>       CALL AOUTST ( 7. DLUR)
    31»t       IY-IY-2*
    31 It       CALL nOUAft$(IX,IY)
    312i       CALL AOUTST (2«, HOUR)
    3131       IY-lV-Zt
    314:       CALL «XM1S( IX. IY)
    3151       IF  (DLAM2.GT..S) GOTO  429*
    316:       CALL AOUTSTf 14, 'GAUSSIAN LNSHPM
    317:       GOTO  43M
    318: 489* CALL  AOUTST ( 12, 'TRIANC LNSHP' )
    319: 43M CONTINUE
    32*:       CALL nOUAtS(4«5,IV)
    381:       IF  (YHCT.EO.l) GOTO 431*
    3aa>       CALL AOUTST (12,'EXPCT. LINES')
    323 «       GOTO 432*
    324: 431* CALL AOUTST (12, 'THEM. LINES')
    325:  438* CONTINUE
    3871      IV- 765
    32*:       CALL WXMiS(69»,IV)
    389»       CALL AOUTST (7, '
    33««       IY • IV -»
33* :>

-------
                                                  PLOT.PLOTS  (CONT'D)
 33H       CALL n
 332i       CALL AOUTST(26.'NO          HEIGHT     TAU'>
 3331       CALL NPTS (N)
 3341       CALL DSPLAY iPLOTX.PLOTV)
 33Si       CO TO 431
 3361  439  CONTINUE
 3371       CALL NPTS (N)
 338i       CALL CPLOT (PLOTX,PLOTY)
 339i  431  CONTINUE
 34*1C  PUT IN LAiELS FOB PARTICULAR CURUC
 34is       ENCODE<426.ENSTUR)ENSTOR(NCASE>
 342s  432  FORMAT (F6.3)
 343t  433 FORTWT 
 3441       ENCODE(432.HTSTUR)HTSTOR
 345i       ENCODE(433.TAUUR)TAUSTR(NCASE>
 346i       IY-IY-29
 34?s       CALL HOVA1S(S39,IY)
 348s       CALL AOUTSTU2.ENSTUR)
 349s       CALL AOUTST(6.HTSTUR)
 3S*«       CALL AOUTST(6,'      ')
 3511       CALL AOUTSm.TAUUR)
 3521       GO TO 429
 3S3i  460  CONTINUE
 354 SC
 3551C StS«St»*t*»»tSStISS
 356SC PART 4     PART 4     PART 4
 357«C »II««««ttt****t*t«tt»«t*t«»»»
 35itC
 359t      NCASC-NCASE-1
 36*i       CALL TSEND
 3€1>       CALL TINPUT(l)
 362s      CALL ERASE
 363i       CALL rtOWAtS (9,7M)
 3641  479 CONTINUE
 36Si      WRITE (6,419)
 36£S  489 FORftAT (' DO YOU UAHT EXTRE5A?'/)
 367s      READ (5,495) DECIS
 3681  495 FORTMT(1X,A2)
 369t      IF (DECIS.EO.'NO') GOTO 569
 379t      WRITE (6.599)     	
 37lt  599 FORflAT (' DEFINE INTCKUAL.'/)
 372t      READ (5.39) XSTR.XSTP
 373t      STLOOr-XSTR-(XSTF-XSTR)*.91
 3741      DO 539 Jl-l.NCASE
 375t      SIMLL-1.
 3761      BIG-9.
 377t      DO 529 IDUM-l.N
 3781      IF (PLOTX(IDUR).lT.SnOOK.Off.PlOTX(IDun).GT.XSTP)  GOTO  529
 3791      DIFl-S«ALL-T»NCA«(Jl.IDUn)
 3Mt      DIF2-TRNCA*(J1.IDUH)-IIC
 3811      IF (DIF1.LE.9.) GOTO 595
 382t      S«ALL.TRHCA$(Jl,IDUn)
 3831      UWIN-PLOTXdDUH)
 3841  59S IF (DIF2.LC.9.) GOTO SM
 385t      flC-TRMCAS(Jl.IDUN)
t>

-------
                                                                PLOT. PLOT'S  (CONT'D)
                 3Mt       LMMX»PLOTX(IDUn)
                 3T7t   520 CONTINUE
                 381t       WRITE (6,540)SHALL,LAHIN,IIG,LAI1AX,ENSTOa
                 391>       IF (Jl.NC.l) GOTO  527
                 393<
                 3941      GOTO 53«
                 39St  587 CONTINUE
                 396 1
                 39? i
                 398 t      URITE  (6.539)        .
                 399«  529 FORWATddX,' HIM RATIO- ' ,F7.4, ,5X, ' MAX RATIO- '.F7.4// )
                 4001  53« CONTINUE
                 40 It      GOTO 470
                 40£(  560 CONTINUE
                 403:      CALL ERASE
                 404:       CALL  FINITT  (0.700)
                 405 «      STOP
                 406 I      END
             406 «>
IT)
                    •0.S. GOVEENHEHT PRINTING OFFICE  1981 0-725-V>li/1113

-------